Denali Owner's Manual - GMC · GMC Sierra Denali Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico-...

Black plate (1,1)GMC Sierra Denali Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico-6118322) - 2014 - crc - 8/14/13

2014 GMC Sierra Denali Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-4

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-39Universal Remote System . . . . 5-46

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-23Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-33Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-50Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-56Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-90

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35


2014 GMC Sierra Denali Owner Manual M

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-87Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-16

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, GMC, theGMC Truck Emblem, SIERRA, andDENALI are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.

Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” for GMCDivision wherever it appears in thismanual.

If the vehicle has the Duramax®

Diesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement for additional andspecific information on this engine.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language manual can beobtained from your dealer, atwww.helminc.com, or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesavant:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 22774304 A First Printing ©2013 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Danger, Warnings, andCautions

{ Danger

Text marked{ Danger providesinformation on risk of fatal injury.Disregarding this information mayendanger life.

{ Warning

Text marked{ Warning providesinformation on risk of accident orinjury. Disregarding thisinformation may lead to injury.

{ Caution

Text marked{ Caution providesinformation that may indicate ahazard that could result in injuryor death. It could also result inpossible damage to the vehicle.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

0 : Adjustable Pedals

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

g : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar® (if equipped)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

( : Heated Steering Wheel

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

g : Outside Power FoldawayMirrors

O : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

_ : Tow/Haul Mode

d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Heated and Cooled FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-9

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Vehicle FeaturesSteering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-16Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 1-17Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-18Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Universal Remote System . . . 1-19Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Performance and MaintenanceTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

1. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6-6.

2. Integrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) System (If Equipped).See Towing Equipment onpage 9-80.

3. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6-1.

Fog Lamps on page 6-5 (IfEquipped).

4. Air Vents on page 8-5.

5. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn andLane-Change Signals onpage 6-4.

Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3.

6. Instrument Cluster on page 5-9.

7. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6-4

8. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9-33.

Tow/Haul Selector Button (IfEquipped). See Tow/Haul Modeon page 9-38.

Range Selection Mode (AllisonTransmission® and Hydra-Matic®

6-Speed Button) (If Equipped).See Manual Mode on page 9-36.

9. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System on page 6-3.

10. Infotainment on page 7-1.

11. Electronic Transfer CaseControl (If Equipped). SeeFour-Wheel Drive onpage 9-39.

Card Holder (If Equipped).

12. Parking Brake on page 9-49.

13. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-17.

14. Cruise Control on page 9-53.

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-60.

15. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5-2 (Out of View).

16. Horn on page 5-3.

17. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10-4.

18. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5-2 (If Equipped).

Driver Information Center (DIC)Controls. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-26.

19. Heated and Cooled FrontSeats on page 3-7 (IfEquipped).

20. Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1.


1-4 In Brief

21. Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-50.

Pedal Adjust Switch (IfEquipped). See AdjustableThrottle and Brake Pedal onpage 9-24.

Cargo Lamp on page 6-6.

Parking Assist Button (IfEquipped). See AssistanceSystems for Parking or Backingon page 9-57.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) on page 9-62 (IfEquipped).

Hill Descent Control Switch (IfEquipped). See Hill DescentControl (HDC) on page 9-52.

Exhaust Brake (If Equipped).See “Exhaust Brake” in theDuramax diesel supplement.

Auxiliary Button (If Equipped).See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9-90.

22. USB Port. See Infotainment onpage 7-1.

23. Power Outlets on page 5-5.

24. Power Outlet (AlternatingCurrent). See Power Outlets onpage 5-5.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe RKE transmitter functions maywork from up to 60 m (197 ft) awayfrom the vehicle.


In Brief 1-5

K : Press to unlock the driver door.Press K again within three secondsto unlock all remaining doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors. Lockand unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-39.

7 : Press and release one time toinitiate vehicle locator. Press 7 andhold for at least three seconds tosound the panic alarm. Press 7again to cancel the panic alarm.

See Keys on page 2-1 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2-3.

Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle.

2. Press and release Q.

3. Immediately, press and hold /for at least four seconds or untilthe turn signal lamps flash.

When the vehicle starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2-6.

Door LocksThere are several ways to lock andunlock the vehicle.

From outside, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter orthe key in the driver door.

From inside, use the power doorlocks.

From inside, pull the door handleonce to unlock the door. Pull againto open the door.


1-6 In Brief

Power Door Locks

Crew/Double Cab Premium Trim,Other Models Similar

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

See Door Locks on page 2-7 andPower Door Locks on page 2-8.

Windows

Power Windows

Crew/Double Cab PremiumShown, Other Models Similar

The driver door has a switch tocontrol all windows. Eachpassenger door has a switch tocontrol that window. The powerwindows work when the ignition is inON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9-29.

Press the switch to lower thewindow. Pull the switch up to raiseit. See Windows on page 2-17 andPower Windows on page 2-18.

Express Windows

If equipped, the express windowfeature allows the windows to beraised or lowered without holdingthe switch.

To activate express-down, press theswitch down fully and release.

The driver window may have theexpress-up feature. Pull the switchup fully and release to activate.


In Brief 1-7

Power Sliding Rear Window

If equipped, the power sliding rearwindow works when the ignition hasbeen turned to ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-29.. Press the switch to open the

window.. Pull the switch down to close the

window.

The power sliding rear windowcannot be operated manually.

Seat Adjustment

Power Seats

To adjust a power seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3-3.

Lumbar Adjustment

To adjust the power lumbar support:. Press and hold the control

forward to increase or rearwardto decrease upper and lowerlumbar support at the same time.


1-8 In Brief

. Press and hold the control up toincrease upper lumbar supportand decrease lower lumbarsupport.

Press and hold the control downto increase lower lumbar supportand decrease upper lumbarsupport.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3-3.

Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3-4.

Memory Features

The SET, "1," "2," andB (Exit)buttons on the driver door are usedto manually save and recall memorysettings for the driver seat, outsidemirrors, and adjustable pedals.

See Memory Seats on page 3-5 andVehicle Personalization onpage 5-39.

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats

The buttons are on the center stack.To operate, the engine must berunning.


In Brief 1-9

PressI to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.

Press J to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

PressA to cool the driver orpassenger seat.

See Heated and Cooled Front Seatson page 3-7.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

See Head Restraints on page 3-2and Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3-3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly.. Safety Belts on page 3-9.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3-10.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-11.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3-38.

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada and Mexico

The passenger sensing system (ifequipped) turns off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. No otherairbag is affected by the passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-24.


1-10 In Brief

The passenger airbag statusindicator lights on the on theoverhead console are visible whenthe vehicle is started. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5-16.

Mirror AdjustmentUsing hood-mounted air deflectorsand add-on convex mirrorattachments could decrease mirrorperformance.

Exterior Mirrors

Power Mirrors

Base Power Mirrors

1. Press (1) or (2) to select thedriver side or passenger sidemirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move the mirror up,down, right or left.

3. Adjust each outside mirror sothat a little of the vehicle and thearea behind it can be seen.

Keep the selector switch in thecenter position when not adjustingeither outside mirror.

Uplevel with Power FoldingMirrors

1. Press (1) or (3) to select thedriver or passenger side mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move the mirror up,down, right, or left.



In Brief 1-11

4. Press either (1) or (3) again todeselect the mirror.

See Power Mirrors on page 2-13.

If equipped with power foldingmirrors:

1. Press (2) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (2) again to fold themirrors in to the folded position.

See Folding Mirrors on page 2-14.

The mirrors may also include amemory function that works with thememory seats. See Memory Seatson page 3-5.

Interior Mirror

Adjustment

Adjust the mirror for a clear view ofthe area behind the vehicle.

Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror

The automatic dimming mirror willautomatically reduce the glare fromthe headlamps from behind. Thedimming feature comes on when thevehicle is started.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2-17.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the tilt and telescopesteering wheel:

1. Push the lever (1) down to movethe steering wheel forward orrearward. Lift the lever up to lockthe wheel in place.

2. Pull the lever (2) toward you andrelease, to move the steeringwheel up or down.

The ignition may need to be set tothe ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition to disengage the tilt andtelescope steering column and alloweasier adjustment.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Throttle and Brake PedalAdjustmentIf equipped, the position of thethrottle and brake pedals can bechanged.


1-12 In Brief

The switch used to adjust thepedals is on the center stack, belowthe climate controls.

Lift the switch up to move thepedals closer to your body. Pressthe switch down to move thepedals away.

See Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal on page 9-24.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

There are dome lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF: Turns the lamps off, evenwhen a door is open.

DOOR: The lamps come onautomatically when a door isopened.

ON: Turns all dome lamps on.

Reading Lamps

There are reading lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped. To operate, the ignitionmust be in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position or usingRetained Accessory Power (RAP).

Pressm orn next to each readinglamp to turn it on or off.


In Brief 1-13

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

O : Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turn the headlampcontrol to the off position again toturn the automatic headlamps orDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada, offwill only work when the vehicle is inP (Park).

AUTO: Automatically turns on theheadlamps at normal brightness,together with the following:. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Roof Marker Lamps (If

Equipped). Front/Rear Sidemarker Lamps

; : Turns on the parking lampsincluding all lamps, except theheadlamps.

5 : Turns on the headlampstogether with the parking lamps andinstrument panel lights.

See:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6-1.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6-3.. Fog Lamps on page 6-5.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control is onthe turn signal lever.

The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the band withz on it.

1 : Fast wipes.

w : Slow wipes.


1-14 In Brief

3 INT: Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

OFF: Turns the windshieldwipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, turn to8,then release. For several wipes,hold the band on8 longer.

L m : Push the paddle at the top ofthe lever to spray washer fluid onthe windshield.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5-3.

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, and ventilationin the vehicle can be controlled withthis system.

1. Driver Temperature Control

2. A/C (Air Conditioning)

3. Air Delivery Mode Controls

4. Fan Control

5. Defrost

6. Passenger Temperature Control

7. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

8. Air Recirculation

9. Power Button

10. Rear Window Defogger

11. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)

See Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1.


In Brief 1-15

Transmission

Range Selection Mode

The Range Selection Mode buttonis located on the shift lever.

To enable Range Selection:

1. Move the column shift lever tothe M (Manual) position. Thecurrent range will appear next tothe M. This is the highestpossible range with all lowergears accessible. As anexample, when 5 (Fifth) gear isselected, 1 (First) through5 (Fifth) gears are available.

2. Press the plus/minus buttons toselect the range of gears forcurrent driving conditions. SeeManual Mode on page 9-36.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/Haulmode can be used.

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-38.

Four-Wheel DriveIf the vehicle has Four-Wheel Drive,the engine's driving power can besent to all four wheels for extratraction.

Transfer Case Controls

The vehicle will have one of twostyles of transfer case controls. Usethese controls to shift into and out ofthe different four-wheel drivemodes.

Electronic Transfer Case

This transfer case knob is to the leftof the steering column.


1-16 In Brief

Automatic Transfer Case

This transfer case knob is to the leftof the steering column.

The different drive options that maybe available are described following.

2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive): This setting is ideal for usewhen road surface tractionconditions are variable.

Do not use AUTO mode to park ona steep grade with poor tractionsuch as ice, snow, mud or gravel. InAUTO mode only the rear wheelswill hold the vehicle from slidingwhen parked. If parking on a steepgrade, use 4 m to keep all fourwheels engaged.

4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Usethis setting when extra traction isneeded, such as on snowy or icyroads or in most off-road situations.

N (Neutral): Shift to this settingonly when towing the vehicle. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10-88 or Trailer Towing onpage 9-73.

4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): Thissetting sends maximum power to allfour wheels. Choose Four-WheelDrive Low when driving in deepsand, mud, or snow, and whileclimbing or descending steep hills.

See Four-Wheel Drive onpage 9-39.

Vehicle Features

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steeringwheel controls. See "SteeringWheel Controls" in the infotainmentmanual.

Cruise Control


In Brief 1-17

5 : Press to turn the system on oroff. The indicator light is on whencruise control is on and turns offwhen cruise control is off.

+ RES: Press briefly to make thevehicle resume to a previously setspeed, or press and hold toaccelerate. If cruise control isalready active, use to increasevehicle speed.

SET −: Press briefly to set thespeed and activate cruise control.If cruise control is already active,use to decrease vehicle speed.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9-53.

Infotainment SystemSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.It also includes information onsettings.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is in the instrumentcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems.

w orx : Press to move up ordown in a list.

o or p : Press to move betweenthe interactive display zones in thecluster.

V : Press to open a menu or selecta menu item. Press and hold toreset values on certain screens.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-26.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, FCA may help avoid orreduce the harm caused byfront-end crashes. FCA provides agreen indicator when a vehicle isdetected directly ahead. Thisindicator displays amber if youfollow another vehicle much tooclosely. When approaching a vehicleahead too quickly, FCA provides ared flashing alert on the windshieldand rapidly beeps or pulses thedriver seat.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-60.


1-18 In Brief

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW is intended to helpavoid unintentional lane departuresat speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) orgreater. LDW uses a camera sensorto detect the lane markings. TheLDW indicator, @, appears green ifa lane marking is detected. If thevehicle departs the lane, theindicator will change to amber andflash. In addition, the driver seat willpulse or beeps will sound.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9-62.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If equipped, the RVC displays aview of the area behind the vehicle,on the center stack display, whenthe vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse).

See Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing on page 9-57.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf equipped, Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) uses sensors on therear bumper to assist with parkingand avoiding objects while inR (Reverse). It operates at speedsless than 8 km/h (5 mph). URPAmay display a warning triangle onthe Rear Vision Camera screen anda graphic on the instrument clusterto provide the object distance. Inaddition, multiple beeps or seatpulses may occur if very close to anobject.

The vehicle may also have the FrontParking Assist system.

See Assistance Systems for Parkingor Backing on page 9-57.

Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone, MP3player, etc.

The vehicle may have up to fouraccessory power outlets.

Vehicle with a Center Console. One or two in front of the

cupholders on the centerconsole.

. One inside the center storageconsole.

. One on the rear of the centerstorage console.

Vehicles with Bench Seats. One on the center stack below

the climate control system.. One or two in the storage area

on the bench seat.

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5-5.


In Brief 1-19

Universal Remote System

If equipped with the UniversalRemote System, these buttons willbe in the front overhead console.

This system provides a way toreplace up to three remote controltransmitters used to activatedevices such as garage dooropeners, security systems, andhome automation devices.

Read the instructions completelybefore attempting to program thetransmitter. Because of the stepsinvolved, it may be helpful to haveanother person assist withprogramming the transmitter.

See Universal Remote System onpage 5-46.

Sunroof

If equipped, the sunroof onlyoperates when the ignition is inACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,or when Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9-29.

Vent: From the closed position,press the rear of the TILT switch tovent the sunroof.

Manual-Open/Manual-Close: Toopen the sunroof, press and holdthe rear of the SLIDE switch until

the sunroof reaches the desiredposition. Press and hold the front ofthe SLIDE switch to close it.

Express-Open/Express-Close: Toexpress-open the sunroof, fullypress and release the rear of theSLIDE switch until the sunroofreaches the desired position. Toexpress-close the sunroof, fullypress and release the front of theSLIDE switch. Press the switchagain to stop it.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshadethat can be pulled forward to blockthe rays of the sun. Open and closethe sunshade manually.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof.

See Sunroof on page 2-21.


1-20 In Brief

Performance andMaintenance

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControlThe vehicle has a traction controlsystem that limits wheel spin andthe StabiliTrak system that assistswith directional control of the vehiclein difficult driving conditions. Bothsystems come on automaticallywhen the vehicle is started andbegins to move.. To turn off traction control, press

and release g on the center

stack. The traction off light idisplays in the instrumentcluster. The appropriate DICmessage displays. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5-34.

. To turn off both traction controland StabiliTrak, press and holdg until i and g illuminate in the

instrument cluster and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5-34.

. Press and release g again toturn on both systems.

. StabiliTrak will automatically turnon if the vehicle exceeds56 km/h (35 mph). Tractioncontrol will remain off.

See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-50.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The low tire pressure warning lightalerts to a significant loss inpressure of one of the vehicle's

tires. If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible and inflatethe tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9-15.The warning light will remain on untilthe tire pressure is corrected.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thismay be an early indicator that thetire pressures are getting low andthe tires need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. Maintainthe correct tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10-59.


In Brief 1-21

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays a DIC message whenit is necessary to change the engineoil and filter. The oil life systemshould be reset to 100% onlyfollowing an oil change.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Display OIL LIFE REMAININGon the DIC. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-26.

2. Press and hold the V for severalseconds. The oil life will changeto 100%.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Fully press the accelerator pedalslowly three times withinfive seconds.

3. Display the OIL LIFEREMAINING on the DIC. If thedisplay shows 100%, the systemis reset.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-11.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline orethanol fuel containing up to 85%ethanol (E85). See E85 or FlexFuelon page 9-66. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under Fuel on page 9-64.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.


1-22 In Brief

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-888-881-3302

TTY Users (U.S. Only):1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

New GMC owners are automaticallyenrolled in the Roadside AssistanceProgram.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13-5.

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices when activated. SeeOnStar Overview on page 14-1.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-6Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

DoorsTailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . 2-11Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-12

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . 2-15Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Interior MirrorsInterior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . 2-17Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ Warning

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous andchildren or others could beseriously injured or killed. Theycould operate the power windowsor other controls or make thevehicle move. The windows willfunction with the keys in theignition, and children or otherscould be caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavechildren in a vehicle with theignition key.


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The key is used for the ignition andall door locks.

Programming Keys

Follow these procedures to programup to eight keys to the vehicle.

Programming with aRecognized Key

To program a new key:

1. Insert the original, alreadyprogrammed key in the ignitionand turn the key to the ON/RUNposition.

2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, andremove the key.

3. Insert the new key to beprogrammed and turn it to theON/RUN position withinfive seconds.

The security light will turn offonce the key has beenprogrammed.

4. Repeat Steps 1–3 if additionalkeys are to be programmed.

If a key is lost or damaged, see yourdealer to have a new key made.

Programming without aRecognized Key

Program a new key to the vehiclewhen a recognized key is notavailable. Canadian regulationsrequire that owners see their dealer.

If there are no currently recognizedkeys available, follow this procedureto program the first key.

This procedure will takeapproximately 30 minutes tocomplete for the first key. Thevehicle must be off and all of thekeys you wish to program must bewith you.

1. Insert the new vehicle key intothe ignition.

2. Turn to ON/RUN. The securitylight will come on.

3. Wait 10 minutes until thesecurity light turns off.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.



5. Repeat Steps 2–4 two moretimes. After the third time, turn toON/RUN; the key is learned andall previously known keys will nolonger work with the vehicle.

Remaining keys can be learned byfollowing the procedure in“Programming with aRecognized Key.”

The key has a bar-coded key tagthat the dealer or qualified locksmithcan use to make new keys. Storethis information in a safe place, notin the vehicle.

See your dealer if a replacementkey or additional key is needed.

If it becomes difficult to turn a key,inspect the key blade for debris.Periodically clean with a brushor pick.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14-1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe RKE transmitter functions maywork up to 60 m (197 ft) away fromthe vehicle.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-3.



With Remote Start (withoutRemote Start Similar)

/ (Remote Vehicle Start):If equipped,/ is used to start theengine from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2-6.

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.

If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), the turnsignal lamps flash once to indicatelocking has occurred. If enabledthrough the DIC, the horn chirps

when Q is pressed again withinthree seconds. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-39.

Pressing Q arms the contenttheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2-11.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding Q forone second will fold the mirrors. Theauto mirror folding feature will notoperate unless it is enabled. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-39.

K (Unlock): Press once to unlockonly the driver door. If K is pressedagain within three seconds, allremaining doors unlock. The interiorlamps may come on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition isturned on.

If enabled through the DIC, the turnsignal lamps flash twice to indicateunlocking has occurred. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-39.If enabled through the DIC, the

exterior lamps may turn on. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-39.

Pressing K on the RKE transmitterdisarms the content theft-deterrentsystem. See Vehicle Alarm Systemon page 2-11.

If equipped with auto mirror folding,pressing and holding K forone second will unfold the mirrors.The auto mirror folding feature willnot operate unless it is enabled.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-39.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release onetime to initiate vehicle locator. Theturn signal lamps flash and the hornsounds three times.

Press and hold 7 for at leastthree seconds to sound the panicalarm. The turn signal lamps flashand the horn sounds repeatedly for30 seconds. The alarm turns offwhen the ignition is moved to ON/



RUN or 7 is pressed again. Theignition must be in LOCK/OFF forthe panic alarm to work.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.Each vehicle can have up toeight transmitters programmed to it.See your dealer for transmitterprogramming.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery in thetransmitter soon if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.

{ Caution

When replacing the battery, donot touch any of the circuitry onthe transmitter. Static from yourbody could damage thetransmitter.

To replace the battery:

1. Separate and remove the backcover of the transmitter with aflat, thin object, such as a coin.

2. Press and slide the battery downtoward the pocket of thetransmitter in the direction of thekey ring. Do not use a metalobject

3. Remove the battery.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Replace with aCR2032 or equivalent battery.

5. Push together the transmitterback cover top side first, andthen the bottom toward thekey ring.



Remote Vehicle StartIf equipped, this feature starts theengine from outside of the vehicle.It may also start up the vehicle'sheating or air conditioning systemsand rear window defogger. Normaloperation of the system will returnafter the key is turned to the ON/RUN position.

The climate control system will usethe previous settings during aremote start. The rear defog maycome on during remote start basedon cold ambient conditions. Therear fog indicator light does notcome on during remote start.

If the vehicle has heated seats andthe feature is turned on in vehiclepersonalization, the heated seatswill turn on during colder outsidetemperatures and will shut off whenthe key is turned to ON/RUN. SeeHeated and Cooled Front Seats onpage 3-7.

Laws in some communities mayrestrict the use of remote starters.For example, some laws may

require a person using the remotestart to have the vehicle in viewwhen doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements onremote starting of vehicles.

Do not use the remote start featureif the vehicle is low on fuel. Thevehicle may run out of fuel.

The RKE transmitter range may beless while the vehicle is running.

Other conditions can affect theperformance of the transmitter. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System on page 2-3 or VehiclePersonalization on page 5-39.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Thisbutton will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle has remotestart.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

1. Aim the RKE transmitter at thevehicle and press andrelease Q.

2. Immediately press and hold /until the turn signal lamps flashor for at least four seconds.

When the vehicle starts, theparking lamps will turn on. Thedoors will be locked and theclimate control system maycome on.

The engine will continue to runfor 10 minutes. Repeat the stepsfor a 10-minute time extension.Remote start can be extendedonly once.

After entering the vehicle during aremote start, insert and turn the keyto ON/RUN to drive the vehicle.

Extending Engine Run Time

The engine run time can beextended by another 10 minutes,if during the first 10 minutesSteps 1–2 are repeated while theengine is still running. This providesa total of 20 minutes.

The remote start can only beextended once.



When the remote start is extended,the second 10-minute period isadded on to the first 10 minutes fora total of 20 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a remote start with an extension,are allowed between ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition must bechanged to ON/RUN/START andthen back to OFF before the remotestart procedure can be used again.

Canceling a Remote Start. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the ignition on and then off.

The vehicle can be remote startedtwo separate times between drivingsequences. The engine will run for10 minutes after each remote start.

Once two remote starts, or a singleremote start with one time extensionhas been done, the vehicle must be

started with the key. After the key isremoved from the ignition, thevehicle can be remote started again.

The vehicle cannot be remotestarted if the key is in the ignition,if the hood is not closed, or if thereis an emission control systemmalfunction and the malfunctionindicator lamp is on.

Also, the engine will turn off during aremote vehicle start if the coolanttemperature gets too high or if theoil pressure gets low.

Door Locks

{ Warning

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

open it. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen you slow down or stopthe vehicle. Locking the doorscan help prevent this fromhappening.



There are several ways to lock andunlock the vehicle.

From outside, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter orthe key in the driver door.

From inside, use the power doorlocks. See Power Door Locks onpage 2-8.

From inside, pull the door handleonce to unlock the door. Pull thehandle again to open the door.

See Vehicle Alarm System onpage 2-11.

Power Door Locks


Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Delayed LockingIf equipped, when locking the doorswith the power lock switch and adoor open, the doors will lockfive seconds after the last door isclosed. Three chimes signal thatdelayed locking is in use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice overrides the delayed lockingfeature and immediately locks alldoors.

This feature will not operate if thekey is in the ignition.

Turn delayed locking on or off usingvehicle personalization. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-39.

Automatic Door LocksThe doors will lock automaticallywhen all doors are closed, theignition is on, and the shift lever ismoved out of P (Park).

To unlock the doors:

. Press K on a door.

. Shift the transmission intoP (Park).



Lockout ProtectionIf the driver side power door lockswitch is pressed when the driverdoor is open and the key is in theignition, all of the doors will lock andthen the driver door will unlock.

This feature may be turned off andon through vehicle personalization.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-39.

Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Crew/Double Cab PremiumShown, Others Similar

Press { to activate the safety lockson the rear doors. The indicator lightcomes on when activated. Thevehicle must be on, in ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9-29.

If the indicator light flashes, thefeature may not be working properly.

Doors

Tailgate

{ Warning

It is extremely dangerous to rideon the tailgate, even when thevehicle is operated at low speeds.People riding on the tailgate caneasily lose their balance and fallin response to vehiclemaneuvers. Falling from a movingvehicle may result in seriousinjuries or death. Do not allowpeople to ride on the tailgate. Besure everyone in your vehicle is ina seat and using a safety beltproperly.

On vehicles with a lock on thetailgate, use the key to lock orunlock the tailgate.

Open the tailgate by lifting up on itshandle while pulling thetailgate down.



To shut the tailgate, firmly push itupward until it latches.

After closing the tailgate, pull it backto be sure it latches securely.

Tailgate Removal

The tailgate can be removed toallow for different loading situations.Assistance may be needed with theremoval to avoid damage to thevehicle.

On vehicles with a Rear VisionCamera, it must be disconnectedbefore removing the tailgate. SeeDriver Assistance Systems onpage 9-56.

To remove the tailgate:

1. Raise the tailgate and support itfirmly. Pull out and hold thecable retaining clip (1). Push thecable (3) up and off of thebolt (2). Repeat on theother side.

2. With the tailgate about halfwayopen, lift the right edge of thetailgate from the lower pivot.

On vehicles with the tailgateassist feature, raise the tailgatenearly all the way to the closedposition prior to removing theleft edge.

3. Move the tailgate to the right andaway to release the left edge.

Reverse this procedure to reinstallthe tailgate. Make sure the tailgateis secure.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makethe vehicle impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm System

If equipped with the anti-theft alarmsystem, the indicator light, on theinstrument panel near thewindshield, indicates the status ofthe system.

Off: Alarm system is disarmed.

On Solid: Vehicle is securedduring the delay to arm the system.

Fast Flash: Vehicle is unsecured.A door or the hood is open.

Slow Flash: Alarm system isarmed.

Arming the Alarm System

1. Turn off the vehicle.

2. Lock the vehicle with one of thefollowing:. Use the RKE transmitter.

. With a door open, press Qon the interior of the door.

3. After 30 seconds the alarmsystem will arm, and theindicator light will begin to slowlyflash indicating the alarm systemis operating. Pressing Q on theRKE transmitter a second timewill bypass the 30-second delayand immediately arm the alarmsystem.

The theft-deterrent alarm system willnot arm if the doors are locked withthe key.

If the driver door is opened withoutfirst unlocking the RKE transmitter,the horn will chirp and the lights will

flash to indicate pre-alarm. If thevehicle is not started, or the door isnot unlocked by pressing K on theRKE transmitter during the10-second pre-alarm, the alarm willbe activated.

If a door or the hood is openedwithout first disarming the system,the turn signals will flash and thehorn will sound for about30 seconds. The alarm system willthen re-arm to monitor for the nextunauthorized event.

Disarming the Alarm System

To disarm the alarm system or turnoff the alarm if it has been activated:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Start the vehicle.

To avoid setting off the alarm byaccident:. Lock the vehicle after all

occupants have left the vehicleand all doors are closed.



. Always unlock a door with theRKE transmitter.

Unlocking the driver door with thekey will not disarm the system orturn off the alarm.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed on the RKEtransmitter and the horn chirps threetimes, an alarm occurred previouslywhile the alarm system was armed.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

Immobilizer Operation

This vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the vehicle isturned off.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the key is turned toON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,or START from the LOCK/OFFposition.

The security light, in the instrumentcluster, comes on if there is aproblem with arming or disarmingthe theft-deterrent system.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamaged,try another ignition key. It may benecessary to check the fuse. SeeFuses on page 10-40. If the engine

still does not start with the other key,the vehicle needs service. If thevehicle does start, the first key maybe faulty. See your dealer.

It is possible for the immobilizersystem to learn new or replacementkeys. Up to eight keys can beprogrammed for the vehicle. Toprogram additional keys, see Keyson page 2-1. To program additionaltransmitters, see Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-3.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates the vehicletheft system in the vehicle.

See your dealer to get a new keyblank cut exactly as the ignition keythat operates the system.



Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ Warning

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

Base Power Mirrors

If equipped with power mirrors:


2. Press one of the four arrows onthe control pad to move themirror in the desired direction.


4. Move the selector switch to thecenter position when notadjusting either outside mirror.



2. Press one of the four arrows onthe control pad while theindicator light on button (1) or (2)is illuminated, to move the mirrorin the desired direction.




4. Press either (1) or (2) again todeselect the mirror.

If you do not deselect the mirror, thefeature will turn off after aboutone minute.

If equipped, the mirrors may includea memory function that works withthe memory seats. See MemorySeats on page 3-5.

Folding Mirrors


Power Folding

If equipped with power foldingmirrors:

1. Press (2) to fold the mirrors outto the driving position.

2. Press (2) again to fold themirrors in to the folded position.

The mirrors may also include amemory function that works with thememory seats. See Memory Seatson page 3-5.

Resetting the Power FoldingMirrors

Reset the power folding mirrors if:. The mirrors are accidentally

obstructed while folding.. They are accidentally manually

folded/unfolded.. The mirrors will not stay in the

unfolded position.. The mirrors vibrate at normal

driving speeds.

Fold and unfold the mirrors threetimes using the mirror controls toreset them to their normal position.A popping noise may be heard. Thissound is normal after a manualfolding operation.



Manual Folding

If equipped, push the mirror towardthe vehicle to fold. Push the mirroroutward to return to its originalposition.

Manually fold the mirrors inward toprevent damage when goingthrough an automatic car wash.

Auto Mirror Folding

If equipped, with the ignition off,press and hold Q on the RKEtransmitter for approximatelyone second to automatically fold theexterior mirrors. Press and hold Kon the RKE transmitter forapproximately one second to unfold.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-3.

This feature is turned on or offthrough vehicle personalization. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-39.

Turn Signal Indicator

If equipped, indicator lights on themirror flash in the direction of theturn or lane change.

Heated MirrorsIf equipped with heated mirrors:

1 (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the mirrors. If thevehicle has towing mirrors, only theupper glass of the mirror is heated.The lower convex part of the towingmirrors is not heated.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8-1.

Automatic DimmingMirrorIf equipped, the driver outside mirrorautomatically adjusts for the glare ofthe headlamps from behind. Thisfeature comes on when the vehicleis started.

Blind Spot MirrorsIf equipped, there is a small convexmirror built into the upper and outercorner of the driver outside rearviewmirror. It can show objects that maybe in the vehicle's blind zone.



Driving with the Blind SpotMirror

Actual Mirror View

1. When the approaching vehicle isa long distance away, the imagein the main mirror is small andnear the inboard edge of themirror.

2. As the vehicle gets closer, theimage in the main mirror getslarger and moves outboard.

3. As the vehicle enters the blindzone, the image transitions fromthe main mirror to the blind spotmirror.

4. When the vehicle is in the blindzone, the image only appears inthe blind spot mirror.

Using the Outside Mirror withthe Blind Spot Mirror

1. Set the main mirror so that theside of the vehicle can just beseen and the blind spot mirrorhas an unobstructed view.

2. When checking for traffic orbefore changing a lane, look atthe main driver/passenger sidemirror to observe traffic in theadjacent lane, behind yourvehicle. Check the blind spotmirror for a vehicle in the blindzone. Then, glance over yourshoulder to double check beforemoving slowly into theadjacent lane.



Park Tilt MirrorsIf equipped with the memorypackage, the passenger and/ordriver mirror tilts to a preselectedposition when the vehicle is inR (Reverse). This feature allows thedriver to view the curb when parallelparking. The mirror(s) return to theoriginal position when the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse), theignition is turned off or to OFF/LOCK, or if the vehicle is drivenin (R) above a predeterminedspeed.

Turn this feature on or off throughvehicle personalization. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5-39.

Interior Mirrors

Interior Rearview MirrorsAdjust the rearview mirror for a clearview of the area behind yourvehicle.

If equipped with OnStar, the vehiclemay have three control buttons atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information aboutOnStar and how to subscribe to it.See OnStar Overview on page 14-1.

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe mirror will automatically reducethe glare of the headlamps frombehind. The dimming feature comeson each time the vehicle is started.

Windows

{ Warning

Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke.



The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof, if equipped.

Power Windows

{ Warning

Children could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Neverleave keys in a vehicle withchildren. When there are childrenin the rear seat, use the windowlockout button to preventoperation of the windows. SeeKeys on page 2-1.


The driver door has a switch tocontrol all windows. Eachpassenger door has a switch tocontrol that window.

The power windows:. Can be operated with the

ignition in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

. Can be operated in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-29.

. Will stop operation when anydoor is opened.

Press the switch down to lower thewindow, and pull up the front of theswitch to raise the window.

Express-Down Windows

The express-down feature allowsthe window to be lowered withoutholding the switch. Press thewindow switch fully and release it toactivate the express-down feature.The express-down feature can becanceled at any time by brieflypressing the switch.

Express-Up Window

The driver window express-upfeature allows the window to beraised without holding the switch.Pull the window switch up fully andrelease it to activate the express-upfeature. The express-up feature canbe canceled at any time by brieflypulling the switch.



Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged or disconnected,or is not working, the driver powerwindow will need to bereprogrammed for the express-upfeature to work.

To reprogram the power windows:

1. Close all doors.

2. Place the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START.

3. From any open position, pull thepower window switch up until thewindow is fully closed.

4. Hold the switch up forapproximately two seconds afterthe window is fully closed.

The window is now reprogrammed.

Express Window Anti-PinchFeature

If any object is in the path of thewindow when express-up is active,the window stops at the obstacleand auto-reverses to a presetfactory position. Weather conditionssuch as severe icing also cause thewindow to auto-reverse. Thewindow returns to normal operationonce the obstacle or condition isremoved.

Express Window Anti-PinchOverride

{ Warning

If express override is activated,the window will not reverseautomatically. You or others couldbe injured and the window couldbe damaged. Before you useexpress override, make sure thatall people and obstructions areclear of the window path.

The anti-pinch feature can beoverridden in a supervised mode.Hold the window switch in thepartially or fully pulled up position.The window rises for as long as theswitch is held. Once the switch isreleased, the express mode isreactivated.

In this mode, the window can stillclose on an object in its path. Usecare when using the override mode.



Window Lockout


Z (Window Lockout): The driverdoor power window switch has alockout feature. This featureprevents the rear windows fromoperating, except from the driverposition. Press the switch to engageor disengage the lockout feature. Anindicator light on the switch willcome on when the lockout feature isengaged, and will go off whendisengaged.

Rear Windows

Power Sliding Rear Window

If equipped, the power sliding rearwindow works when the ignition hasbeen turned to ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN, or when RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) is active.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9-29.. Press the switch to open the

window.. Pull the switch to close the

window.

The power sliding rear windowcannot be operated manually.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. If equipped, detach the sunvisor from the center mount to pivotto the side window or to extendalong the rod.



Roof

Sunroof

If equipped, the sunroof operateswhen the ignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP) isactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9-29.

Vent: From the closed position,press the rear of the TILT switch tovent the sunroof.

Manual-Open/Manual-Close: Toopen the sunroof, press and holdthe rear of the SLIDE switch untilthe sunroof reaches the desiredposition. Press and hold the front ofthe SLIDE switch to close it

Express-Open/Express-Close: Toexpress-open the sunroof, fullypress and release the rear of theSLIDE switch until the sunroofreaches the desired position. Toexpress-close the sunroof, fullypress and release the front of theSLIDE switch. Press the switchagain to stop it.

When the sunroof is opened, an airdeflector will automatically raise.The air deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

The sunroof also has a sunshade,which can be pulled forward to blocksun rays. The sunshade must beopened and closed manually.

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation or noise. It could also plugthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunrooftracks.

If water is seen dripping into thewater drainage system, this isnormal.



2 NOTES


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsPower Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Heated and Cooled FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-16Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-16Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-19When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-29

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-30Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-35Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-37Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Securing Child Restraints(Front OutboardPassenger) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsFront Seats

The vehicle’s front seats haveadjustable head restraints in theoutboard seating positions.

{ Warning

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the restraintdown. Try to move the headrestraint after the button is releasedto make sure that it is locked inplace.

The head restraints adjust forwardand rearward. To adjust the headrestraint forward, grasp the head



restraint and pull forward to thedesired locking position. To adjustthe head restraint rearward, graspthe head restraint and pull forwardfully until the mechanism releasesand allows the head restraint toreturn to the full rear position.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.

Rear Seats

The rear seat has adjustableheadrests in the outboard seatingpositions.

The height of the headrest can beadjusted. Pull the headrest up toraise it. To lower the headrest, pushthe headrest down.

If you are installing a child restraintin the rear seat, see “Securing aChild Restraint Designed for theLATCH System” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-38.

Front Seats

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust a power seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

To adjust the setback, see RecliningSeatbacks on page 3-4.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment on page 3-3.

Some vehicles are equipped with afeature that activates a vibratingpulse alert in the driver seat to helpthe driver avoid crashes. See DriverAssistance Systems on page 9-56.

Lumbar Adjustment



To adjust the power lumbar support:. Press and hold the control

forward to increase or rearwardto decrease upper and lowerlumbar support at the same time.

. Press and hold the control up toincrease upper lumbar supportand decrease lower lumbarsupport.

Press and hold the control downto increase lower lumbar supportand decrease upper lumbarsupport.

Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust the seatback:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

{ Warning

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job.

The shoulder belt will not beagainst your body. Instead, it willbe in front of you. In a crash, youcould go into it, receiving neck orother injuries.

The lap belt could go up overyour abdomen. The belt forceswould be there, not at your pelvicbones. This could cause seriousinternal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.



Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.

Memory Seats

The SET, "1," "2," andB (Exit)buttons on the driver door are usedto manually save and recall memorysettings for the driver seat, outsidemirrors, and adjustable pedals.

Storing Memory Positions

To save positions to the “1” and “2”buttons:

1. Adjust the driver seat, outsidemirrors, and adjustable pedals tothe desired driving positions.

2. Press and release SET, thenimmediately press and hold “1”until a beep sounds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for asecond driver using “2.”

To save positions to theB (Exit)button and easy exit features:

1. Adjust the driver seat, adjustablepedals, and the outside mirrorson some vehicles to the desiredpositions for getting out of thevehicle.

2. Press and release SET, thenimmediately press and holdBuntil a beep sounds.

Manually Recalling MemoryPositions

If the vehicle is off, or in ON/RUN/START but not in P (Park), pressand hold "1," "2," orB to manuallyrecall the previously stored memorypositions. Releasing "1,” "2," orBbefore the stored positions arereached stops the recall.



If the vehicle is in ON/RUN/STARTand in P (Park), press and release“1,” “2,” orB to manually recall thepreviously stored memory positions.Placing the ignition in OFF/LOCKbefore the stored positions arereached stops the recall.

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or adjustable pedals whilerecalling a memory position, therecall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold theappropriate manual control for thememory item that is not recalling fortwo seconds. Try recalling thememory position again by pressingthe appropriate memory button.If the memory position is still notrecalling, see your dealer forservice.

Automatically Recalling MemoryPositions (Auto Memory Recall)

The Auto (Automatic) MemoryRecall feature automatically recallsthe current driver’s previously stored“1” or “2” position when entering thevehicle.

If the Auto Memory Recall feature isenabled in the vehiclepersonalization menu, memory “1”or “2” positions are recalled in thefollowing ways:

. Press K on the RKE transmitterand open the driver door.

. Press K on the RKE transmitterwhen the driver door isalready open.

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-39.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory, power mirror orpower seat controls; or press theadjustable pedal control.

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or the adjustable pedalswhile recalling a memory position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold theappropriate manual control for thememory item that is not recalling fortwo seconds. Try recalling thememory position again by openingthe driver door and pressing K on

the RKE transmitter. If the memoryposition is still not recalling, seeyour dealer for service.

Easy Exit Recall

If programmed on in the vehiclepersonalization menu, the easy exitfeature automatically moves thedriver seat, adjustable pedals, andoutside mirrors on some vehicles tothe memory positions saved to theB (Exit) button. See “StoringMemory Positions” listed previously.See also Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-39.

Easy exit recall automaticallyactivates when one of the followingoccurs:. The vehicle is turned off and the

driver door is opened within ashort time.

. The vehicle is turned off with thedriver door open.

If something has blocked the driverseat and/or adjustable pedals whilerecalling the exit position, the recallmay stop. Remove the obstruction;



then press and hold the appropriatemanual control for the exit featurenot recalling for two seconds. Tryrecalling the exit position again.If the exit position is still notrecalling, see your dealer forservice.

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats

{ Warning

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burns. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater to

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

overheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

The buttons are on the center stack.To operate, the engine must berunning.

PressI to heat the driver orpassenger seatback only.

Press J to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

PressA to cool the driver orpassenger seat.

The indicator light on the buttoncomes on when this feature is on.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the seat will change tothe next lower setting, and then tothe off setting. The indicator lightsnext to the buttons indicate three forthe highest setting and one for thelowest. If the heated seats are onhigh, their level may automaticallybe lowered.

Remote Start Heated and CooledSeats

During a remote start, the heated orcooled seats can be turned onautomatically. When it is coldoutside, the heated seats turn on,and when it is hot outside thecooled seats turn on. The heated orcooled seats are canceled when the



ignition is turned on. Press theheated or cooled seat button to usethe heated or cooled seats after thevehicle is started.

The heated or cooled seat indicatorlights do not turn on during a remotestart.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated or cooled seats will notturn on during a remote start unlessthey are enabled in the vehiclepersonalization menu. See RemoteVehicle Start on page 2-6 andVehicle Personalization onpage 5-39.

Rear SeatsFolding Rear Seat

Either side of the rear seat can befolded for added cargo space.

{ Caution

Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may causedamage to the seat or the safetybelts. Always unbuckle the safetybelts and return them to theirnormal stowed position beforefolding a rear seat.

Make sure that nothing is on theseat cushion.

To fold the seat, slowly pull the seatcushion up.

To return the seat to the normalseating position, slowly pull the seatcushion down.

Make sure the safety belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatcushion.



{ Warning

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ Warning

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areas

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

are more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5-15.



Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!

When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from the

safety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be— whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts— not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3-31 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3-33.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.



. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ Warning

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.



Engaging the child restraintlocking feature may affect thepassenger sensing system,if equipped. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-24for more information.

For the driver and front outboardseating positions on light dutyvehicles, if the webbing locks inthe latch plate before it reachesthe buckle, tilt the latch plate flatto unlock.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3-16.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andfront outboard passenger.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3-10.

Push down on the release button tomove the height adjuster to thedesired position.

Move the adjuster up by pushing upon the shoulder belt guide.

After the adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pushing the release buttonto make sure it has locked intoposition.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal, nearfrontal, or rear crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if thevehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a sidecrash. If the vehicle has rollovercapable roof-rail airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten thesafety belts in a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andthe vehicle’s safety belt system willprobably need other new parts. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System Partsafter a Crash on page 3-17.



Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

Rear safety belt comfort guides mayprovide added safety belt comfortfor older children who haveoutgrown booster seats and forsome adults. When installed on ashoulder belt, the comfort guidepositions the shoulder belt awayfrom the neck and head.

This vehicle may have an adjustablecomfort guide. Additional comfortguides are available through yourdealer.

To install the adjustable comfortguide to the seatback and thesafety belt:

1. Locate the anchorage loop onthe rear outboard seatback, nearthe top.

2. Attach the adjustable comfortguide to the anchor loop bythreading the hook throughthe loop.

3. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.



4. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

5. The elastic cord on the comfortguide is adjustable. Make itlonger or shorter by squeezingboth ends of the plastic adjusterand pulling on the elastic cord orthe guide.

6. Adjust the guide so the shoulderportion of the belt is on theshoulder and not falling off of it.The belt should be close to, butnot contacting, the neck.Improper comfort guideadjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt ina crash.

{ Warning

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

7. Buckle and position the safetybelt as described previously inthis section. Make sure that theshoulder belt crosses theshoulder.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide.Un-hook the guide from the loop onthe seat. Store the guide in aconvenient place like the glove boxfor the next time it is needed.



Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. See the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5-15.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3-16.

Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.



{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

inspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-15.

Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and theperson seated directly behindthe front outboard passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG on the trimor on a label near the deploymentopening.



For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theseatback closest to the door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ Warning

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, even

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

with airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3-21.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.



{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Always secure childrenproperly in the vehicle. To readhow, see Older Children onpage 3-31 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 3-33.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument cluster, whichshows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-15 formore information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and frontoutboard passenger are in the sideof the seatbacks closest to the door.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,front outboard passenger, andsecond row outboard passengersare in the ceiling above the sidewindows.

{ Warning

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object into

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

that person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate?This vehicle is equipped withairbags. See Airbag System onpage 3-17. Airbags are designed toinflate if the impact exceeds thespecific airbag system's deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants. The vehicle haselectronic sensors which help theairbag system determine theseverity of the impact. Deploymentthresholds can vary with specificvehicle design.

Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.

It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, inrear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

In addition, if the GVWR (GrossVehicle Weight Rating) is at orbelow 3 855 kg (8,500 lb), thevehicle has advanced technologyfrontal airbags. You can find theGVWR on the Certification/Tire labelon the center pillar of the vehicle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15 for more information.

Advanced technology frontal airbagsadjust the restraint according tocrash severity. Vehicles withadvanced technology frontal airbags

have a seat position sensor thatenables the sensing system tomonitor the position of the driverseat. The seat position sensorprovides information that is used toadjust the deployment of the driverfrontal airbag.

If the GVWR is at or below 4 536 kg(10,000 lb), the vehicle hasseat-mounted side impact airbags.Vehicles with a GVWR above4 536 kg (10,000 lb) may or may nothave seat-mounted side impactairbags. Seat-mounted side impactairbags, if equipped, are designedto inflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. Seat-mounted sideimpact airbags are not designed toinflate in frontal impacts, near frontalimpacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis designed to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck.

Vehicles with a GVWR at or below3 855 kg (8,500 lb) have roof-railairbags. These roof-rail airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to



severe side crashes depending onthe location of the impact. Inaddition, these roof-rail airbags aredesigned to inflate during a rolloveror in a severe frontal impact. Theroof-rail airbags are not designed toinflate in rear impacts. Both roof-railairbags will inflate when either sideof the vehicle is struck or if thesensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over on itsside, or in a severe frontal impact.

Vehicles with a GVWR above3 855 kg (8,500 lb) up to andincluding 4 536 kg (10,000 lb) alsohave roof-rail airbags. Theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. Both roof-rail airbagswill inflate when either side of thevehicle is struck. In addition, theseroof-rail airbags are designed toinflate in a severe frontal impact.The roof-rail airbags are alsorollover capable except on modelssold as an incomplete vehicle withthe pickup box removed. If the

roof-rail airbags are rollovercapable, both roof-rail airbags willalso inflate if the sensing systempredicts that the vehicle is about toroll over on its side. The roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts.

Vehicles with a GVWR above4 536 kg (10,000 lb) may or may notbe equipped with roof-rail airbags.These roof-rail airbags, if equipped,are designed to inflate in moderateto severe side crashes dependingon the location of the impact. Bothroof-rail airbags will inflate wheneither side of the vehicle is struck.In addition, these roof-rail airbagsare designed to inflate in a severefrontal impact. If the vehicle hassingle rear wheels and has afactory-installed pickup box androof-rail airbags, the roof-rail airbagsare rollover capable. If the vehiclehas dual rear wheels, or is sold asan incomplete vehicle, as a chassiscab, or with the pickup boxremoved, and has roof-rail airbags,the roof-rail airbags are not rollover

capable. If the airbags are rollovercapable, both roof-rail airbags willalso inflate if the sensing systempredicts that the vehicle is about toroll over on its side. The roof-railairbags are not designed to inflate inrear impacts.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag locations, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3-19.



How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3-21.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-19.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There may

be some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ Warning

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.



The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps, turn on thehazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, turnoff the interior lamps, and turn offthe hazard warning flashers byusing the controls for thosefeatures.

{ Warning

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13-14 and Event DataRecorders on page 13-14.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle may have a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will light on the overheadconsole when the vehicle is started.



United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. When thesystem check is complete, either theword ON or OFF, or the symbol foron or off, will be visible. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5-16.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag under

certain conditions. No other airbagis affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seatand safety belt. The sensors aredesigned to detect the presence ofa properly seated occupant anddetermine if the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag should beallowed to inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off thepassenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is off.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

If the vehicle does not have a rearseat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, arear-facing child restraint should notbe installed in the vehicle, even ifthe airbag is off.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines an infant

is present in a child restraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag,the off indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-16.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the front outboardpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit as a reminder that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, depending upon theperson's seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraints shouldwear a safety beltproperly—whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5-15 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag ifthe system determines that an infantis present in a child restraint. If achild restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) on page 3-45 or SecuringChild Restraints (Front OutboardPassenger) on page 3-47. Evenif the child restraint is equippedwith a safety belt lock-off, make

sure the safety belt retractor islocked by pulling the shoulderbelt all the way out of theretractor before tightening thesafety belt. When the retractorlock is set, the belt can betightened but not pulled out ofthe retractor.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3-2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbag for achild in a child restraint dependingupon the child’s size. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Sized Occupant



If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat or that the childrestraint locking feature is engaged.If this happens, use the followingsteps to allow the system to detectthat person and enable the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. If the shoulder portion of the beltis pulled out all the way, thechild restraint locking feature willbe engaged. This mayunintentionally cause the

passenger sensing system toturn the airbag off for someadult-sized occupants. If thishappens, unbuckle the belt, letthe belt go back all the way, andthen buckle the belt againwithout pulling the belt out allthe way.

6. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

{ Warning

If the front outboard passengerairbag is turned off for anadult-sized occupant, the airbagwill not be able to inflate and helpprotect that person in a crash,resulting in an increased risk ofserious injury or even death. Anadult-sized occupant should notride in the front outboardpassenger seat, if the passengerairbag off indicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-29 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.



The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop,or other electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired, remove the object fromthe seat.

{ Warning

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. To

purchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13-11.

{ Warning

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end, or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. The

operation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbagmodules, ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, overhead console,front sensors, side impact sensors,or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle may have apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that are partof the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery, or trim; or withGM covers, upholstery, or trimdesigned for a different vehicle. Anyobject, such as an aftermarket seatheater or a comfort-enhancing pad



or device, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system. Thiscould either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3-24.

If the vehicle has rollover roof-railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels on page 10-68 foradditional important information.

If a snow plow is added to thevehicle, the airbags should still workproperly. The airbag systems weredesigned to work properly under awide range of conditions, includingsnow plowing with vehicles thathave the optional snow plow preppackage (RPO VYU). Do notchange or defeat the snow plow's“tripping mechanism.” If you do, itcan damage the snow plow and thevehicle, and may cause an airbagdeployment.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andyou have questions about whetherthe modifications will affect thevehicle's airbag system, or if youhave questions about whether theairbag system will be affected if thevehicle is modified for any otherreason, call Customer Assistance.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13-3.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-15.

{ Caution

If an airbag covering is damaged,opened, or broken, the airbagmay not work properly. Do notopen or break the airbag

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

coverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbagcoverings, have the airbagcovering and/or airbag modulereplaced. For the location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3-19. See yourdealer for service.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the airbagsystems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and may notprotect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbag

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

systems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5-15.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3-11. If the shoulder beltstill does not rest on theshoulder, then return to thebooster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.



. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3-11.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in a rear seating position.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ Warning

Never allow more than one childto wear the same safety belt. Thesafety belt cannot properly spreadthe impact forces. In a crash, theycan be crushed together andseriously injured. A safety beltmust be used by only one personat a time.

{ Warning

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lap

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

belt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Every time infants and youngchildren ride in vehicles, they shouldhave the protection provided byappropriate child restraints. Neitherthe vehicle's safety belt system norits airbag system is designedfor them.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ Warning

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ Warning

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

seat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child's

weight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturerinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.



{ Warning

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. In acrash, if an infant is in arear-facing child restraint, thecrash forces can be distributedacross the strongest part of aninfant's body, the back andshoulders. Infants should alwaysbe secured in rear-facing childrestraints.

{ Warning

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

Rear-Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat providesrestraint with the seating surfaceagainst the back of the infant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat providesrestraint for the child's body with theharness.

Booster Seats

A booster seat is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-38.



Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle— even when no child isin it.

In some areas of the United Statesand Canada, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child Within theChild Restraint

{ Warning

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

Whenever possible, children aged12 and under should be secured ina rear seating position.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great if theairbag deploys.

{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

The vehicle may have apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turnedoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, no system isfail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

far back as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-24 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or child

restraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system secures a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.LATCH attachments on the childrestraint are used to attach the childrestraint to the anchors in the



vehicle. This system is designed tomake installation of a child restrainteasier.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. LATCH-compatiblerear-facing and forward-facing childseats can be properly installedusing either the LATCH anchors orthe vehicle’s safety belts. Do notuse both the safety belts and theLATCH anchorage system to securea rear-facing or forward-facingchild seat.

Booster seats use the vehicle’ssafety belts to secure the child inthe booster seat. If the manufacturerrecommends that the booster seatbe secured with the LATCH system,this can be done as long as thebooster seat can be positionedproperly and there is no interferencewith the proper positioning of thelap-shoulder belt on the child.

Make sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint,and also the instructions in thismanual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

The LATCH anchorage system canbe used until the combined weightof the child plus the child restraint is29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety beltalone instead of the LATCHanchorage system once thecombined weight is more than29.5 kg (65 lbs).

The following explains how to attacha child restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (1) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (2).



Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top ofthe child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (2) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (3) or a dual tether (4).Either will have a singleattachment (2) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.



To assist in locating the loweranchors on crew cab models, eachseating position with lower anchorshas two labels near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

The top tether anchors are the loopsnear the top of the seatback foreach rear seating position. Theseloops will be used to route the toptether through, as well as, to securethe top tether to the vehicle. Be sureto use the anchor (loop) on the

same side of the vehicle as theseating position where the childrestraint will be placed.

Be sure to read the followinginstructions to properly install a childrestraint using these loops.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3-37 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ Warning

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ Warning

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor,except for the center top tether

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

anchors in the crew cab models.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ Warning

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

of the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

{ Caution

Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-37.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to yourchild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.



1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. For forward facing childrestraints, attach and tighten thetop tether to the top tetheranchor (loop), if your vehicle hasone. Follow the child restraintinstructions the vehicle LATCHanchor weight limits described atthe beginning of this section,and the following steps:

Example — Rear Driver SidePosition

Example — Rear Driver SidePosition

2.1. For a top tether in the reardriver side position:

2.1.1. Raise the headrest.

2.1.2. Route the toptether (4) betweenthe headrest posts,through the loop (3),behind the inboardheadrest post, andunder the centershoulder belt (2).



2.1.3. Then attach the toptether (4) to the toptetheranchor (loop) (1) atthe center rearseating position.

2.2. For a top tether in the rearcenter position:

2.2.1. Route the toptether (4) through thecenter loop (1), andbehind thepassenger sideheadrest post.

2.2.2. Then attach the toptether (4) to the toptether anchor (loop)at the rearpassenger sideseating position.

2.3. For a top tether in the rearpassenger position:

2.3.1. Raise the headrest.

2.3.2. Route the toptether (4) betweenthe headrest posts,

through the loop onthe passenger sideand behind theinboardheadrest post.

2.3.3. Then attach the toptether (4) to the toptetheranchor (loop) (1) atthe center rearseating position.

3. Tighten the top tether per thechild restraint manufacturer'sinstructions.

When the top tether is properlytightened, the anchor (loop) maybend. This is normal and will notdamage the vehicle.

If child restraints are installed inboth outboard positions, both toptethers can be attached to thecenter loop. Top tethers can beattached for child restraints in allthree rear seating positions atthe same time, following therouting instructions above.

4. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement for proper installation.

Headrest Removal andReinstallation

Removing Rear Headrests

For outboard rear seating positions,if the child restraint cannot beinstalled properly with the headrestin place, the headrest may beremoved. See your dealer forassistance with removal and storethe removed headrests in a secureplace. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the head restbefore the seating position is used.



Reinstalling Rear Headrests

To reinstall the headrest:

1. Insert the headrest posts into theholes in the top of the seatbackwith the longer chrome platedpost toward the driver side of thevehicle.

2. Push the headrest all the waydown until it contacts the top ofthe seatback.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ Warning

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-38 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If you secure a childrestraint using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3-38 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.



In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3-37.

If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether,attach and tighten the top tether tothe top tether anchor. Refer to theinstructions that came with the childrestraint and see Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-38.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-38.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side-to-side andback-and-forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

For outboard rear seating positions,if the child restraint cannot beinstalled properly with the headrestin place, the headrest may beremoved. See your dealer for

assistance with removal, and storethe removed headrest in a secureplace. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestbefore the seating position is used.For reinstallation instructions, see“Headrest Removal andReinstallation” under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-38.

Securing Child Restraints(Front OutboardPassenger)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-37.

In addition, the vehicle may have apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3-24 and Passenger Airbag



Status Indicator on page 5-16 formore information on this, includingimportant safety information.


{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the frontoutboard passenger airbaginflates and the passenger seat isin a forward position.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

The vehicle may have apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagunder certain conditions.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turnedoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, no system isfail-safe. No one can guaranteethat an airbag will not deployunder some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

far back as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3-24 for additionalinformation.


Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or if



the instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.


You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turnedoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag, the off indicator inthe passenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5-16.




Position the release button sothat the safety belt could bequickly unbuckled if necessary.






7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

When the passenger sensingsystem, if equipped, has turned offthe front outboard passenger frontalairbag, the off indicator in thepassenger airbag status indicatorshould light and stay lit when youstart the vehicle.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3-24 for moreinformation.


Heavy-Duty Only

This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3-37.


{ Warning

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the front outboardpassenger's airbag inflates. Thisis because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflating

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

airbag. Always secure arear-facing child restraint in arear seat.


Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.


You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.




Make sure the release button ispositioned so you would be ableto unbuckle the safety beltquickly if necessary.






7. If your child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3-38 for moreinformation on using the toptether anchors.

8. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.



Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsStorage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-3Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-4

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

StorageCompartments

{ Warning

Do not store heavy or sharpobjects in storage compartments.In a crash, these objects maycause the cover to open andcould result in injury.

Glove Box

To access the upper glove box, usethe key to open it and pull up on thehandle.

To access the lower glove box, pulldown on the handle.


4-2 Storage

Cupholders

Front

Base

If equipped, there are cupholders onthe center front seat consolearmrest.

Uplevel

If equipped, the cupholders in thecenter console can be placed overthe mid or front storagecompartment, or between them toaccess both storage compartments.

Lift the cupholder from the sides toremove it.

Insert the cupholder between theguides on the console and pushdown to secure it.

Rear

If equipped, pull the rear seatarmrest down to access thecupholders.

Sunglasses Storage

If equipped, sunglasses storage ison the overhead console. Press thefixed button on the cover andrelease to access.


Storage 4-3

Center Console Storage

Base

If equipped with the base console,pull the front center seat armrestdown to access the storage areawith cupholders.

Press the button and lift to open.There is a removable divider.

There is an accessory power outlet,USB port, auxiliary jack, and SDcard reader inside.

Uplevel Shown, Other ModelsSimilar

If equipped, the uplevel centerconsole may contain the followingfeatures:

1. Tote Compartment

2. Accessory Power Outlets

3. Power Cord Openings

4. Removable Cupholders

5. Device Holder

6. USB Ports

7. High Voltage Power Outlet(HVPO) (if equipped)

8. SD Card Reader

9. Auxiliary Jack

10. Latch

11. Rear Seat Audio (RSA)

Press the latch (10) and lift thearmrest to open the main storagecompartment.

There is an open storagecompartment on the rear of thecenter console.

See Power Outlets on page 5-5 and“Audio Players” in the infotainmentmanual.


4-4 Storage

Floor Console Storage

If equipped with front seat floorconsole storage, unlock with theignition key, press the button, andlift to open.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Tie-Downs

If equipped, the vehicle has cargotie-downs.

Any of the nine holes inside thetruck bed can be used for tie-downs.

The maximum load is 113 kg(250 lb) per tie-down.

{ Caution

The truck bed walls will collapse ifthe tie-downs are overloaded.

To install:

1. Insert a tie-down loop assemblyuntil it is flush with the truckbed wall.


Storage 4-5

2. Turn the tie-down loop clockwiseto tighten. The tie-down will behard to turn until the togglemoves past the installation pointon the toggle guide.

3. Fasten the tie-down firmly byhand only. Do not use tools.

To remove:

1. Remove the tie-down loopcompletely by turningcounterclockwise while holdingthe backing plate against thetruck bed wall.

2. Pull the backing plate away fromthe truck bed wall until a click isheard. This locks the toggle intoposition on the toggle guide.

3. Push the backing plate againstthe truck bed wall. This allowsthe toggle nut to spin.

4. Remove the backing plate,toggle guide, and toggle nutfrom the truck bed wallcompletely.

5. Reinstall the tie-down loopthrough the backing plate intothe toggle nut for reuse.


4-6 Storage

2 NOTES


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Heated Steering Wheel . . . . . . . 5-3Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-15Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-15Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-17MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . 5-21Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . 5-21Hill Descent Control Light . . . . 5-22Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . 5-22Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-23Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-23

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-24Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-25Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-25Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-30Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-30Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-31Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-31Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-32Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-32Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-33Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-35Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-35Steering SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-36


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

Vehicle Speed Messages . . . . 5-39Washer Fluid Messages . . . . . 5-39

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-39

Universal Remote SystemUniversal Remote System . . . 5-46Universal Remote SystemProgramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46

Universal Remote SystemOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the tilt and telescopesteering wheel:

1. Push the lever (1) down to movethe steering wheel forward orrearward. Lift the lever up to lockthe wheel in place.

2. Pull the lever (2) toward you andrelease, to move the steeringwheel up or down.

The ignition may need to be set tothe ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition to disengage the tilt andtelescope steering column and alloweasier adjustment.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Steering Wheel ControlsThe infotainment system can beoperated by using the steeringwheel controls. See "SteeringWheel Controls" in the infotainmentmanual.



Heated Steering Wheel

( (Heated Steering Wheel): Pressto turn it on or off. A light next to thebutton displays when the feature isturned on.

The steering wheel takes aboutthree minutes to start heating.

HornTo sound the horn, press the centerpad on the steering wheel.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper control is onthe turn signal lever.

The windshield wipers are controlledby turning the band withz on it.

1 (High Speed): Fast wipes.

w (Low Speed): Slow wipes.

3 INT (Adjustable IntervalWipes): Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

OFF: Turns the windshieldwipers off.

8 (Mist): For a single wipe, turnto8, then release. For several

wipes, hold the band on8 longer.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged wiper bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10-34.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor. An internal circuitbreaker to the motor will stop themotor until it cools down.

Wiper Parking

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are onw,1, or3 INT,they will immediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to OFF before the driverdoor is opened or within 10 minutes,the wipers will restart and move tothe base of the windshield.

If the ignition is put in OFF while thewipers are performing wipes due towindshield washing, the wiperscontinue to run until they reach thebase of the windshield.



Windshield Washer

{ Warning

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

L m (Washer Fluid): Push thepaddle marked with the windshieldwasher symbol at the top of the turnsignal lever, to spray washer fluidand activate the wipers. The wiperswill continue until the paddle isreleased or the maximum wash timeis reached. When the paddle isreleased, additional wipes mayoccur depending on how long thewindshield washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-25 for information on fillingthe windshield washer fluidreservoir.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna,StabiliTrak®, and vehicle speedinformation.

The compass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine when aGPS signal is restored and providea heading again. See CompassMessages on page 5-30 for themessages that may be displayed forthe compass.

Clock

Setting the Time and Date withFaceplate Controls

To set the time or date:

1. Select SETTINGS from theHome Page, then select Timeand Date.

2. Select the desired function.

3. Turn the MENU knob to increaseor decrease the value.

4. Press the MENU knob to go tothe next value. After the lastvalue is selected, the system willupdate and return to the Settingsmenu. Press o BACK to go tothe last menu and save thechanges.

If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.



To set the clock display:

1. Select SETTINGS from theHome Page, then select Timeand Date.

2. Select Clock Display.

3. Turn the MENU knob to Offor On.

4. Press the MENU knob to select.

Press o BACK to go to the lastmenu and save the changes.

Setting the Time and Date withTouchscreen Controls

To set the time:

1. Press the SETTINGS screenbutton from the Home Page,then press Time and Date.

2. Press Set Time and press« orª to increase or decreasehours, minutes, and AM or PM.Press 12–24 Hr for 12 or24 hour clock.

3. Press the } screen button to goback to the previous menu.

If auto timing is set, the timedisplayed on the clock may notupdate immediately when drivinginto a new time zone.

To set the date:

1. Press the SETTINGS screenbutton from the Home Page,then press Time and Date.

2. Press Set Date and press« orª to increase or decreasemonth, day, or year.


To set the clock display:

1. Press the SETTINGS screenbutton and press Time and Date.

2. Press Clock Display and pressOFF or ON to turn the clockdisplay off or on.


Power OutletsAccessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone, MP3player, etc.

The vehicle may have up to fouraccessory power outlets.

Vehicles with a Center Console. One or two in front of the

cupholders on the centerconsole.

. One inside the center storageconsole.

. One on the rear of the centerstorage console.

Vehicles with Bench Seats. One on the center stack below

the climate control system.. One or two in the storage area

on the bench seat.

Lift the cover to access and replacewhen not in use.



The power outlets on the centerstack and in front of the cupholdersare powered at all times. The poweroutlets inside the storage area andon the rear of the console arepowered when the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,or when RAP is active.

{ Warning

Power is always supplied to theoutlets. Do not leave electricalequipment plugged in when thevehicle is not in use because thevehicle could catch fire and causeinjury or death.

{ Caution

Leaving electrical equipmentplugged in for an extended periodof time while the vehicle is off willdrain the battery. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipmentthat exceeds the maximum15 amp rating.

Certain power accessory plugs maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withthe equipment. See Add-OnElectrical Equipment on page 9-90.

{ Caution

Hanging heavy equipment fromthe power outlet can causedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. The poweroutlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.



Power Outlet 110 VoltAlternating Current

Base Shown, Uplevel Similar

If equipped with this power outlet, itcan be used to plug in electricalequipment that uses a maximumlimit of 150 watts.

For vehicles with a center console,the 110 volt power outlet is in frontof the cupholders in the centerconsole.

For vehicles with bench seats, the110 volt power outlet is on thecenter stack.

An indicator light on the outlet turnson to show it is in use. The lightcomes on when the ignition is inON/RUN, equipment requiring lessthan 150 watts is plugged into theoutlet, and no system fault isdetected.

The indicator light does not come onwhen the ignition is in LOCK/OFF orif the equipment is not fully seatedinto the outlet.

If equipment is connected usingmore than 150 watts or a systemfault is detected, a protection circuitshuts off the power supply and theindicator light turns off. To reset thecircuit, unplug the item and plug itback in or turn the RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) off andthen back on. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9-29.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following, and may not workproperly if they are plugged in:. Equipment with high initial peak

wattage, such ascompressor-driven refrigeratorsand electric power tools.

. Other equipment requiring anextremely stable power supply,such asmicrocomputer-controlledelectric blankets and touchsensor lamps.



Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Standard Theme Shown, Metric Similar



Cluster Menu

There is an interactive display areain the center of the instrumentcluster.

Use the right steering wheel controlto open and scroll through thedifferent items and displays.

Press o to access the cluster

applications. Usew orx to scrollthrough the list of availableapplications. Not all applications willbe available on all vehicles.

. Info App. This is where theselected Driver InformationCenter (DIC) displays can beviewed. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-26.

. Audio

. Phone

. Navigation

. Settings

Audio

Press V to select the Audio app,

then press p to enter the Audiomenu. In the Audio menu browse formusic, select from the favorites,or change the audio source. Useworx to change the station or go tothe next or previous track.

Phone

Press V to select the Phone app,

then press p to enter the Phonemenu. In the Phone menu, if there isno active phone call, view recentcalls, or scroll through contacts.

If there is an active call, mute thephone or switch to handsetoperation.

Navigation

Press V to select the Navigation

app, then press p to enter theNavigation menu. If there is noactive route, you can resume thelast route and turn the voiceprompts on/off. If there is an activeroute, press V to cancel or resumeroute guidance or turn the voiceprompts on or off.

Settings

Press V to select the Settings app,

then press p to enter the Settings

menu. Usew orx to scrollthrough items in the Settings menu.

Units: Press p while Units isdisplayed to enter the Units menu.Choose English, Imperial, or metricunits by pressing V while the



desired item is highlighted.A checkmark will be displayed nextto the selected item.

Display Themes: There are threeinstrument cluster displayconfigurations to choose from:Standard, Technology, and Media.

Info Pages: Press p while InfoPages is displayed to enter the InfoPages menu and select the items tobe displayed in the Info app. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5-26.

Speed Warning: The SpeedWarning display allows the driver toset a speed that they do not want toexceed. To set the Speed Warning,press p when Speed Warning is

displayed. Pressw orx to adjust

the value. Press V to set the speed.Once the speed is set, this featurecan be turned off by pressing Vwhile viewing this page. If theselected speed limit is exceeded, apop-up warning is displayed with achime.

Software Information: Displaysopen source software information.

SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles. The odometerdisplays on the Speed page of theDriver Information Center (DIC).

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-26.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

{ Caution

If the engine is operated with thetachometer in the shaded warningarea, the vehicle could bedamaged, and the damageswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.



Fuel Gauge

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how muchfuel is left in the tank.

There is an arrow near the fuelgauge pointing to the side of thevehicle the fuel door is on.

When the indicator nears empty, thelow fuel light comes on. There still isa little fuel left, but the vehicleshould be refueled soon.

Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine Oil PressureGauge

Metric



English

The engine oil pressure gaugeshows the engine oil pressurein kPa (kilopascals) or psi (poundsper square inch) when the engine isrunning.

Oil pressure can vary with enginespeed, outside temperature and oilviscosity.

A reading outside the normaloperating range can be caused by adangerously low oil level or someother problem causing low oil

pressure. Check the vehicle's oil assoon as possible. See “OILPRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE”under Engine Oil Messages onpage 5-31 and Engine Oil onpage 10-8.

{ Caution

Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. Driving with the engineoil low can also damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Check the oil level as soon aspossible. Add oil if required, but ifthe oil level is within the operatingrange and the oil pressure is stilllow, have the vehicle serviced.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric



English

This gauge measures thetemperature of the vehicle's enginecoolant.

While driving under normaloperating conditions, if the needlemoves into the red warning area,the engine is too hot. Pull off theroad, stop the vehicle, and turn offthe engine as soon as possible.

Voltmeter Gauge

When the ignition is on, this gaugeindicates the battery voltage.

When the engine is running, thisgauge shows the condition of thecharging system. The gauge cantransition from a higher to lower or alower to higher reading. This isnormal. If the vehicle is operatingoutside the normal operating range,the charging system light comes on.See Charging System Light onpage 5-17 for more information. The

voltmeter gauge may also readlower when in fuel economy mode.This is normal.

Readings outside the normaloperating range can also occurwhen a large number of electricalaccessories are operating in thevehicle and the engine is left idlingfor an extended period. Thiscondition is normal since thecharging system is not able toprovide full power at engine idle. Asengine speeds are increased, thiscondition should correct itself ashigher engine speeds allow thecharging system to create maximumpower.

The vehicle can only be driven for ashort time with the readings outsidethe normal operating range. If thevehicle must be driven, turn off allaccessories, such as the radio andair conditioner.



Readings outside the normaloperating range indicate a possibleproblem in the electrical system.Have the vehicle serviced as soonas possible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentcluster.

When the vehicle is started this lightflashes and a chime may come onto remind the driver to fasten theirsafety belt. Then the light stays onsolid until the belt is buckled. Thiscycle may continue several times if

the driver remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

There may be a passenger safetybelt reminder light near thepassenger airbag status indicator.See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3-24.

For vehicles equipped with thepassenger safety belt warning light,when the vehicle is started this lightflashes and a chime may come onto remind passengers to fasten theirsafety belt. Then the light stays onsolid until the belt is buckled. This

cycle continues several times if thepassenger remains or becomesunbuckled while the vehicle ismoving.

If the passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltwarning light and chime may turn onif an object is put on the seat suchas a briefcase, handbag, grocerybag, laptop, or other electronicdevice. To turn off the warning lightand/or chime, remove the objectfrom the seat or buckle thesafety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem with the airbagsystem. The system check includesthe airbag sensor(s), passengersensing system (if equipped), thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring, and the crash sensing



and diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3-17.

The airbag readiness light comes onfor several seconds when thevehicle is started. If the light doesnot come on then, have it fixedimmediately.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflate

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

without a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

If there is a problem with the airbagsystem, a Driver Information Center(DIC) message may also come on.See Airbag System Messages onpage 5-35.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle may have a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3-24 forimportant safety information. Theoverhead console has a passengerairbag status indicator.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.



If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the airbag status indicator, itmeans that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ Warning

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag Readiness

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

Light on page 5-15 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.It should go out when the engine isstarted.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, or isflashing, the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) also displays amessage.

See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5-29.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, helping tomaintain a clean environment. Themalfunction indicator lamp comeson when the vehicle is placed inON/RUN, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer. SeeIgnition Positions on page 9-24.



If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on while the engine isrunning, this indicates that the OBDII system has detected a problemand diagnosis and service might berequired.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system alsoassists the service technician incorrectly diagnosing anymalfunction.

{ Caution

If the vehicle is continually drivenwith this light on, the emissioncontrols might not work as well,

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

the vehicle fuel economy mightnot be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. Thiscould lead to costly repairs thatmight not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Modifications made to the engine,transmission, exhaust, intake,or fuel system of the vehicle orthe replacement of the originaltires with other than those of thesame Tire Performance Criteria(TPC) can affect the vehicle'semission controls and can causethis light to come on.Modifications to these systemscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also result in a failure

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.



If the light continues to flash, find asafe place to stop and park thevehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait atleast 10 seconds, and restart theengine. If the light is still flashing,follow the previous steps and seeyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission control systemmalfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9-67. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It may require at least one full tankof the proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Fuel on page 9-64.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Depending on where you live, yourvehicle may be required toparticipate in an emission controlsystem inspection and maintenanceprogram. For the inspection, theemission system test equipment willlikely connect to the vehicle's DataLink Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on when



the ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off. See yourdealer for assistance in verifyingproper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

This light should come on brieflywhen the engine is started. If it doesnot come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn if there is aproblem.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light also comes onwhen the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fullyreleased, it means the vehicle has abrake problem.

If the light comes on while driving,pull off the road and stop carefully.The pedal might be harder to push,or the pedal can go closer to thefloor. It may take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10-87.

{ Warning

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled off

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

the road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

If the ABS light stays on, turn theignition off.

If the light comes on while driving,stop as soon as it is safely possibleand turn off the vehicle. Then startthe engine again to reset the

system. If the ABS light stays on,or comes on again while driving, thevehicle needs service. A chime mayalso sound when the light comes onsteady.

If the ABS light is the only light on,the vehicle has regular brakes, butthe antilock brakes are notfunctioning.

If both the ABS and the brakesystem warning light are on, thevehicle's antilock brakes are notfunctioning and there is a problemwith the regular brakes. See yourdealer for service.

See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-20 and Brake SystemMessages on page 5-30.

Four-Wheel-Drive Light

The four-wheel-drive light comes onwhen the transfer case is shiftedinto four-wheel drive and the frontaxle engages. LO or HI will also benext to this light when the vehicle isin four-wheel low or four-wheel high.

Some delay between the shiftingand the light coming on is normal.

See Four-Wheel Drive onpage 9-39.

Tow/Haul Mode Light

For vehicles with the Tow/HaulMode feature, this light comes onwhen the Tow/Haul Mode has beenactivated.

See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-38.



Hill Descent Control Light

If equipped, the Hill Descent Controllight comes on steady when thesystem is ready for use. When thelight flashes, the system is active.

See Hill Descent Control (HDC) onpage 9-52.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light

This light comes on green when thesystem is on and ready to operate.When the system determines that

the vehicle is leaving its lanewithout using the turn signal, thislight will change to amber and flash.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9-62.

Vehicle Ahead Indicator

If equipped, this light displays greenwhen a vehicle is detected ahead.

This light will display amber whenyou are following a vehicle aheadmuch too closely.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-60.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.




StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off,the system does not assist incontrolling the vehicle. Turn on theTCS and the StabiliTrak systemsand the warning light turns off.


Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

This light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS, and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.


Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.



A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Tire Messages onpage 5-36. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-57.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-60.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is near the fuel gauge andcomes on briefly when the ignition isturned on as a check to show it isworking.

It also comes on when the fuel tankis low on fuel. The light turns offwhen fuel is added. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced.

Security Light

The security light should come onbriefly as the engine is started. If itdoes not come on, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally, theindicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operationon page 2-12.



High-Beam On Light

This light comes on when thehigh-beam headlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6-2.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with fog lamps, thislight comes on when the fog lampsare on.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6-5 for moreinformation.

Lamps On Reminder

This light comes on when theexterior lamps are in use. SeeExterior Lamp Controls on page 6-1.

Cruise Control Light

For vehicles with cruise control, thecruise control light is white when thecruise control is on and ready, andturns green when the cruise controlis set and active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9-53.



Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC displays are shown in thecenter of the instrument cluster inthe Info App. See Instrument Clusteron page 5-9. The displays show thestatus of many vehicle systems. Thecontrols for the DIC are on the rightsteering wheel control.

w orx : Press to move up ordown in a list.

o or p : Press move between theinteractive display zones in thecluster.

V (Set/Reset): Press to open amenu or select a menu item. Pressand hold to reset values on certainscreens.

DIC Info Page Options

The info pages on the DIC can beturned on or off through theSettings menu.

1. Press o to access the clusterapplications.

2. Pressw orx to scroll to theSettings application.

3. Press V to enter theSettings menu.

4. Scroll to Info Pages andpress p.

5. Pressw orx to move throughthe list of possible informationdisplays.

6. Press V while an item ishighlighted to select or deselectthat item. When an item isselected, a checkmark willappear next to it.

DIC Info Pages

The following is the list of allpossible DIC info page displays.Some may not be available for yourparticular vehicle. Some items maynot be turned on by default but canbe turned on through the Settingsapp. See “DIC Info Page Options”earlier in this section.

Speed: Shows the vehicle speed ineither kilometers per hour (km/h) ormiles per hour (mph). The vehicleodometer is also shown onthis page.

Trip A or Trip B, Average FuelEconomy, and Average Speed:Shows the current distance traveled,in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi), since the trip odometerwas last reset.



The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg). Thisnumber is calculated based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg) recordedsince the last time this menu itemwas reset.

The Average Speed display showsthe average speed of the vehicle inkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value.

Press and hold V while this displayis active to reset the trip odometer,the average fuel economy, and theaverage speed. Or press p andselect reset in the menu.

Fuel Range and InstantaneousFuel Economy: Shows theapproximate distance the vehiclecan be driven without refueling.LOW will be displayed when thevehicle is low on fuel. The fuelrange estimate is based on an

average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. It also shows if theActive Fuel Management is activeand in V4 mode, or inactive and inV8 mode. See Active FuelManagement® on page 9-32.

The Instantaneous Fuel Economydisplay shows the current fueleconomy in either liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the fuel economy thatthe vehicle has right now andchanges frequently as drivingconditions change.

Timer and Fuel Used: This displaycan be used as a timer. To start thetimer, press V while this display isactive. The display will show theamount of time that has passedsince the timer was last reset. Tostop the timer, press V briefly whilethis display is active and the timer isrunning.

Also shows the number of liters (L)or gallons (gal) of fuel used sincethe last reset of this menu item.

Press and hold V while this displayis active to reset the timer and fuelused. Each of these items can bereset individually by pressing pwhile this display is active.

Oil Life: Shows an estimate of theoil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5-31. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 10-8. In additionto the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3.



The Oil Life display must be resetafter each oil change. It will notreset itself. Do not to reset the OilLife display at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, press andhold V for several seconds whilethe Oil Life display is active. SeeEngine Oil Life System onpage 10-11.

Tire Pressure: Shows theapproximate pressures of all fourtires. Tire pressure is displayed ineither kilopascal (kPa) or in poundsper square inch (psi). If the pressureis low, the value for that tire isshown in amber. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 10-59 andTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10-60.

Best Fuel Economy: This pagedisplays average fuel economy, thebest fuel economy over the selecteddistance, and a bar graph showinginstantaneous fuel economy.

Press p to change the selected

distance. Press and hold V whilethis display is active to reset thebest fuel economy and average fueleconomy. This display can also bereset by selecting reset in the menu.

Top Consumers: Shows a list ofthe features that are currentlyimpacting the fuel economy, in orderfrom highest to lowest. If a feature isturned off, it will be removed fromthe list.

Economy Trend: Shows history ofthe Average Fuel Economy from thelast 50 km (30 mi). Each barrepresents about 5 km (3 mi) ofdriving. During driving the bars willshift to always reflect the mostrecent distance on the right side.Press and hold V to clear the graph

or press p to reset throughthe menu.

ECO Index: The bar graphprovides feedback on the efficiencyof current driving behavior. Thegraph shows a value that is based

on current fuel consumptioncompared to what is expected fromthe vehicle with good and baddriving habits. It also shows if theActive Fuel Management is activeand in V4 mode, or inactive and inV8 mode. See Active FuelManagement® on page 9-32.

Engine Hours: Shows the totalnumber of hours the engine has run.This display also shows the engineidle hours.

Trailer Brake: On vehicles with theIntegrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) system, the trailer brakedisplay appears in the DIC.

TRAILER GAIN shows the trailergain setting. This setting can beadjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with eithera trailer connected or disconnected.

OUTPUT shows the power output tothe trailer any time a trailer withelectric brakes is connected. Outputis displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashesmay appear in the OUTPUT display.



Speed Signs: Shows signinformation, which comes from aroadway database in the onboardnavigation.

Following Distance: Used toselect the alert timing for theForward Collision Alert (FCA). SeeForward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9-60.

Blank Page: Shows noinformation.

Transmission Fluid TemperatureGauge: This gauge shows thetemperature of the automatictransmission fluid in either degreesCelsius (°C) or degreesFahrenheit (°F).

Vehicle MessagesMessages displayed on the DICindicate the status of the vehicle orsome action may be needed tocorrect a condition. Multiplemessages may appear one afteranother.

The messages that do not requireimmediate action can beacknowledged and cleared bypressing V.

The messages that requireimmediate action cannot be cleareduntil that action is performed.

All messages should be takenseriously and clearing the messagedoes not correct the problem.

The following are the possiblemessages and some informationabout them.


Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY LOW STARTVEHICLE

When the vehicle’s battery isseverely discharged, this messagewill display and four chimes willsound. Start the vehicleimmediately. If the vehicle is notstarted and the battery continues todischarge, the climate controls,heated seats, and audio systemswill shut off and the vehicle mayrequire a jump start. These systemswill function again after the vehicleis started.

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thebattery voltage drops belowexpected levels and features aredisabled. Turn off all unnecessaryaccessory features.



SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays if there is a problem withthe battery charging system. Undercertain conditions, the chargingsystem light may also turn on in theinstrument cluster. See ChargingSystem Light on page 5-17. Drivingwith this problem could drain thebattery. Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories. Have the electricalsystem checked as soon aspossible. See your dealer.

TRANSPORT MODE ON

This message is displayed when thevehicle is in transport mode. Somefeatures can be disabled while inthis mode, including RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE), remote start,and the vehicle alarm system. Takethe vehicle to your dealer for serviceto turn transport mode off.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid on page 10-27.

SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST

This message may be displayedwhen there is a problem with thebrake boost assist system. Whenthis message is displayed, the brakeboost assist motor might be heardoperating and you might noticepulsation in the brake pedal. This isnormal under these conditions. Takethe vehicle to your dealer forservice.

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKESYSTEM

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message displays and a chimemay sound when there is a problemwith the ITBC system.

When this message displays, poweris no longer available to the trailerbrakes.

As soon as it is safe to do so,carefully pull your vehicle over tothe side of the road and turn theignition off. Check the wiringconnection to the trailer and turn theignition back on. If this message stilldisplays, either your vehicle or thetrailer needs service. See yourdealer.

See “Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System” under TowingEquipment on page 9-80 for moreinformation.

Compass MessagesDashes may be displayed if thevehicle temporarily losescommunication with the GlobalPositioning System (GPS).



Door Ajar Messages

DOOR OPEN

This message displays and a chimemay sound if a door is not fullyclosed. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the door forobstructions, and close the dooragain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

HOOD OPEN

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the hood is not fullyclosed. Stop and turn off thevehicle, check the hood forobstructions, and close the hoodagain. Check to see if the messagestill appears on the DIC.

Engine Cooling SystemMessages

AIR CONDITIONING OFF

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.

See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5-13. To avoidadded strain on a hot engine, the airconditioning compressorautomatically turns off. When thecoolant temperature returns tonormal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. You cancontinue to drive your vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gauge onpage 5-13.

ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the engine coolingsystem reaches unsafe

temperatures for operation. Stopand turn off the vehicle as soon as itis safe to do so to avoid severedamage. This message clears whenthe engine has cooled to a safeoperating temperature.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message. See EngineOil Life System on page 10-11 forinformation on how to reset themessage. See Engine Oil onpage 10-8 and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-3.

ENGINE OIL LOW ADD OIL

On some vehicles, this messagedisplays when the engine oil levelmay be too low. Check the oil levelbefore filling to the recommendedlevel. If the oil is not low and this



message remains on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service.See Engine Oil on page 10-8.

ENGINE OIL HOT IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil becomes hotter than thenormal operating temperature. Stopand allow the vehicle to idle until itcools down. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5-13.

OIL PRESSURE LOW STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. See EngineOil on page 10-8.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays and a chimemay sound when the cooling systemtemperature gets too hot and theengine further enters the enginecoolant protection mode. SeeEngine Overheating on page 10-21for more information.

This message also displays whenthe vehicle's engine power isreduced. Reduced engine powercan affect the vehicle's ability toaccelerate. If this message is on,but there is no reduction inperformance, proceed to yourdestination. The performance maybe reduced the next time the vehicleis driven. The vehicle may be drivenat a reduced speed while thismessage is on, but acceleration andspeed may be reduced. Anytimethis message stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the fuel level is low.Refuel as soon as possible. SeeFuel Gauge on page 5-12 and Fuelon page 9-64.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message may display alongwith the malfunction indicator lampon the instrument cluster if thevehicle's fuel cap is not tightenedproperly. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-17. Reinstall thefuel cap fully. See Filling the Tankon page 9-67. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperlyinstalled. A loose or missing fuelcap allows fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. A few driving trips withthe cap properly installed shouldturn this light and message off.



Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays if a RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitterbattery is low. The battery needs tobe replaced in the transmitter. See“Battery Replacement” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2-3.

Lamp Messages

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message displays and a chimesounds if a turn signal is left on for1.2 km (0.75 mi). Move the turnsignal lever to the off position.

Object Detection SystemMessages

FORWARD COLLISIONALERT OFF

This message displays when theForward Collision Alert has beenturned off.

FRONT CAMERA BLOCKEDCLEAN WINDSHIELD

This message displays when thecamera is blocked. Cleaning theoutside of the windshield behind therearview mirror may correct theissue. The Lane Departure Warning(LDW) system and ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) will notoperate.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNINGUNAVAILABLE

This message displays whenattempting to activate the LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) system

when it is temporarily unavailable.The LDW system does not needservice.

This message could be due to thecamera being blocked. Cleaning theoutside of the windshield behind therearview mirror may correct theissue.

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message displays when theParking Assist system has beenturned off or when there is atemporary condition causing thesystem to be disabled.

SERVICE FRONT CAMERA

If this message remains on aftercontinued driving, the vehicle needsservice. Do not use the LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) andForward Collision Alert (FCA)features. Take the vehicle to yourdealer.



SERVICE PARKING ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Parking Assistsystem. Do not use this system tohelp you park. See your dealer forservice.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE STABILITRAK

If this message displays, it meansthere may be a problem with theStabiliTrak system. If you see thismessage, try to reset the system.Stop; turn off the engine for at least15 seconds; then start the engineagain. If this message still comeson, it means there is a problem. Youshould see your dealer for service.The vehicle is safe to drive;however, you do not have thebenefit of StabiliTrak, so reduceyour speed and drive accordingly.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). When thismessage displays, the system willnot limit wheel spin. Adjust yourdriving accordingly. See your dealerfor service. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-50.

STABILITRAK INITIALIZING

This message may come on if theStabiliTrak system has not fullyinitialized because of roadconditions or the incorrect tire size.When the StabiliTrak system is fullyinitialized, the message will turn off.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-50. If thismessage continues to be displayedfor multiple ignition cycles and ondifferent road surfaces, see yourdealer for service.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when thetraction control has been turned off.See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-50.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when thetraction control is active. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl on page 9-50.

STABILITRAK OFF

This message displays when theStabiliTrak system has been turnedoff. Adjust your driving accordingly.To limit wheel spin and realize thefull benefits of the stabilityenhancement system, you shouldnormally leave StabiliTrak on. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl on page 9-50.



STABILITRAK OFF may alsodisplay when the stability controlhas been automatically disabled.The following conditions can causethis message to appear:. The system is overheating,

which could occur if StabiliTrakactivates continuously for anextended period of time.

. The brake system warning lightis on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5-20.

. The stability system takes longerthan usual to complete itsdiagnostic checks due to drivingconditions.

. An engine or vehicle-relatedproblem has been detected andthe vehicle needs service. Seeyour dealer.

. The transfer case is inFour-Wheel Drive Low.

The message turns off as soon asthe conditions that caused themessage to be displayed are nolonger present.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIR BAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Have your dealer inspect thesystem for problems. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5-15 andAirbag System on page 3-17 formore information.

Security Messages

SERVICE THEFT DETERRENTSYSTEM

This message displays when thereis a problem with the theft-deterrentsystem. The vehicle may or may notrestart, so you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turningoff the engine. See ImmobilizerOperation on page 2-12.

Steering SystemMessages

POWER STEERING ASSISTREDUCED DRIVE WITH CARE

This message may display if aproblem occurs with the electricpower steering system. If thismessage appears, steering effortmaybe slightly higher than normal.The vehicle is still safe to drive. Usecaution while in reduced assistmode. See Steering on page 9-4.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays when thereis a problem with electronic powersteering. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service. See Steering onpage 9-4.



Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

If equipped with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays if a part on thesystem is not working properly. Thetire pressure light also flashes andthen remains on during the sameignition cycle. See Tire PressureLight on page 5-23. Severalconditions may cause this messageto appear. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10-60.If the warning comes on and stayson, there may be a problem with theTPMS. See your dealer.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

If equipped with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when the systemis relearning the tire positions onyour vehicle. The tire positions mustbe relearned after rotating the tires

or after replacing a tire or sensor.See Tire Inspection on page 10-63,Tire Rotation on page 10-63, TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10-59, and Tire Pressure onpage 10-57.

TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADDAIR TO TIRE

If equipped with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low. This messagealso displays with a vehicle pictureto indicate the location of the lowtire. The low tire pressure warninglight will also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5-23. Youcan receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. If a tirepressure message appears on theDIC, stop as soon as you can. Havethe tire pressures checked and setto those shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. See Tireson page 10-48, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-15, and Tire Pressure onpage 10-57. The DIC also showsthe tire pressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-26.

Transmission Messages

4WD OFF

If equipped with four-wheel drive,this message displays when thefour-wheel-drive system istemporarily disabled due to anoverheated condition. The vehiclewill run in two-wheel drive when thismessage is present. Once thefour-wheel-drive system cools down,the message turns off and thefour-wheel-drive system returns tonormal operation.

4WD SHIFT IN PROGRESS

This message will display while thefour-wheel-drive system is shifting.



FOR 4WD LOW SLOW TO XXX

If a four-wheel drive shift intoFour-Wheel Drive Low is requested,but the vehicle speed is too high,this message will display until thecorrect vehicle speed is reached.

FOR 4WD LOW SHIFT TONEUTRAL

If a four-wheel drive shift intoFour-Wheel Drive Low is requested,and the vehicle speed is correct, butthe transmission is not inN (Neutral), this message willdisplay until the transmission isshifted to N (Neutral).

GRADE BRAKING OFF

This message displays when gradebraking has been disabled with theTow/Haul Mode button on the end ofthe shift lever. See Tow/Haul Modeon page 9-38, AutomaticTransmission on page 9-33, andCruise Control on page 9-53.

GRADE BRAKING ON

This message displays when gradebraking has been enabled with theTow/Haul Mode button on the end ofthe shift lever. See Tow/Haul Modeon page 9-38, AutomaticTransmission on page 9-33, andCruise Control on page 9-53.

GRADE BRAKING ACTIVE

This message displays when gradebraking has been activated whiledriving on downhill grades. Thismessage will only appear the firsttime the feature is activated in anignition cycle. See Tow/Haul Modeon page 9-38, AutomaticTransmission on page 9-33, andCruise Control on page 9-53.

SERVICE 4WD

If the vehicle has four-wheel drive,this message may display if aproblem occurs with thefour-wheel-drive system. If thismessage appears, stop as soon aspossible and turn off the vehicle.Make sure the key is in the LOCK/

OFF position for at leastone minute, then restart the vehicleand check for the message on theDIC display. If the message is stilldisplayed or appears again whenyou begin driving, thefour-wheel-drive system needsservice. See your dealer.

TO EXIT 4WD LOW SLOWTO XXX

If a four-wheel drive shift out ofFour-Wheel Drive Low is requested,but the vehicle speed is too high,this message will display until thecorrect vehicle speed is reached.

TO EXIT 4WD LOW SHIFT TONEUTRAL

If a four-wheel drive shift out ofFour-Wheel Drive Low is requested,and the vehicle speed is correct, butthe transmission is not inN (Neutral), this message willdisplay until the transmission isshifted to N (Neutral).



TRANSMISSION HOT IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimemay sound if the transmission fluidin the vehicle gets hot. Driving withthe transmission fluid temperaturehigh can cause damage to thevehicle. Stop the vehicle and let itidle to allow the transmission tocool. This message clears and thechime stops when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

VEHICLE IN 4WD LOW

This message will display if thevehicle is driven in Four-WheelDrive Low for about 10 minutesabove 72 km/h (45 mph).

Vehicle ReminderMessages

CHECK TRAILER WIRING

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message may display and achime may sound when one of thefollowing conditions exists:. A trailer with electric brakes

becomes disconnected from thevehicle.

‐ If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is stopped, thismessage clears itself after ashort time.

‐ If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is moving, thismessage stays on until theignition is turned off.

. There is a short in the wiring tothe electric trailer brakes.

When this message displays, poweris no longer available to the trailerbrakes.

As soon as it is safe to do so,carefully pull the vehicle over to theside of the road and turn the ignitionoff. Check the wiring connection tothe trailer and turn the ignition backon. This message clears if the traileris reconnected. This message alsoclears if you acknowledge it. If thismessage still displays, either thevehicle or the trailer needs service.See your dealer.

See “Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System” under TowingEquipment on page 9-80.

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when iceconditions are possible.

TRAILER CONNECTED

On vehicles with the IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) system,this message displays briefly whena trailer with electric or electric overhydraulic brakes is first connectedto the vehicle.



This message clears itself afterseveral seconds. This message alsoclears if you acknowledge it. Afterthis message clears, the TRAILERGAIN and OUTPUT displays appearin the DIC.

See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-26 and “Integrated TrailerBrake Control System” underTowing Equipment on page 9-80.

Vehicle Speed Messages

REDUCE SPEED FOR HILLDESCENT CONTROL

This message displays whenattempting to enable Hill DescentControl (HDC) when the vehiclespeed is too high. See Hill DescentControl (HDC) on page 9-52.

Washer Fluid Messages

WASHER FLUID LOW ADDFLUID

This message displays when thewindshield washer fluid is low. Fillthe windshield washer fluid reservoiras soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5 for the location of thewindshield washer fluid reservoir.Also, see Washer Fluid onpage 10-25 for more information.

VehiclePersonalizationUse the audio system controls toaccess the personalization menusfor customizing vehicle features.

The following are all possiblepersonalization features. Dependingon the vehicle, some may not beavailable.

Radio Audio System Controls

1. Press the desired feature todisplay a list of availableoptions.

2. Press to select the desiredfeature setting.

3. Press o BACK on the faceplate

or the 0 screen button to returnto the previous menu or exit.

Turn the vehicle to ON/RUN toaccess the Settings menu, thenselect SETTINGS from the HomePage on the infotainment systemdisplay.



Personalization Menus

The following list of menu items maybe available:. Time and Date. Language [Language]. Valet Mode. Radio. Vehicle. Bluetooth. Voice. Display. Rear Camera. Return to Factory Settings. Software Information

Detailed information for each menufollows.

Time and Date

Manually set the time and date. SeeClock on page 5-4.

Language [Language]

Select Language, then select fromthe available language(s).

The selected language will displayon the system, and voicerecognition will reflect the selectedlanguage.

Valet Mode

This will lock the infotainmentsystem, the infotainment controls,and screen storage location.

To turn Valet Mode on and off, entera four-digit code on the keypad.Press Enter to go to theconfirmation screen. Re-enter thefour-digit code. Press LOCK to lockthe system. Enter the four-digit codeto unlock the system. Press theBack screen button to go back tothe previous menu.

Radio

Press to display the Radio menuand the following may display:. Manage Favorites

. Number of Favorites Pages

. Audible Touch Feedback

. Auto Volume

. Maximum Startup Volume

. Audio Cue Volume

Manage Favorites

This allows favorites to be edited.See “Manage Favorites” in“Settings” under “Radio” in theinfotainment manual.

Number of Favorites Pages

Press to set the number of favoritesto display.

Select the desired number or selectAuto and the infotainment systemwill automatically adjust the numberof favorites shown.

Audible Touch Feedback

This allows Audible TouchFeedback to be turned on or off.

Select Off or On.



Auto Volume

This feature adjusts the volumebased on vehicle speed andambient noise.

Select Off, Low, Medium-Low,Medium, Medium-High, or High.

Maximum Startup Volume

This feature sets the maximumstartup volume. If the vehicle isstarted and the volume is greaterthan this level, the volume isadjusted to this level. To set themaximum startup volume, press +or − to increase or decrease.

Audio Cue Volume

This feature sets the volume ofaudio files played at system startupand shutdown.

Select On, then press + or − toincrease or decrease the volume.

Vehicle

Select and the following maydisplay:. Climate and Air Quality

. Collision/Detection Systems

. Comfort and Convenience

. Lighting

. Power Door Locks

. Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Climate and Air Quality

Select the Climate and Air Qualitymenu and the following may display:. Auto Fan Max Speed. Air Quality Sensor. Auto Compartment Zone Temp. Auto Defog. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Max Speed

This feature will set the maximumauto fan speed.

Select Low, Medium, or High.

Air Quality Sensor

This allows for selection of airquality sensor operation at high orlow sensitivity. Only vehicles withthe dual automatic climate controlwill have this option.

Select Off, Low Sensitivity, or HighSensitivity.

Auto Compartment Zone Temp

This feature allows for selection ofthe compartment zone temperaturesetting when the vehicle isrestarted.

Select Single Zone, Dual Zone,or Last Setting.

Auto Defog

When set to on, the front defog willautomatically come on when thevehicle is started. Only vehicles withthe dual automatic climate controlwill have this option.

Select Off or On.



Auto Rear Defog

If equipped, this feature willautomatically turn on the rearwindow defogger when it is coldoutside.

Select Off or On.

Collision/Detection Systems

Select the Collision/DetectionSystems menu and the followingmay display:. Alert Type. Auto Collision Preparation. Park Assist

Alert Type

This feature will set crash alerts tobeeps or seat vibrations. Thissetting affects all crash alertsincluding Forward Collision Alert,Lane Departure Warning, and ParkAssist alerts.

Select Beeps or Safety Alert Seat.

Auto Collision Preparation

This feature will turn on or off theForward Collision Alert feature aswell as the automatic brakingcapability of the Auto CollisionPreparation feature. With the Alertand Brake setting, both ForwardCollision Alert as well as theautomatic braking capability of theAuto Collision Preparation featureare available. The Alert settingdisables most automatic brakingfunctions of the Auto CollisionPreparation feature. Somelast-second automatic brakingcapability is still provided with theAlert setting, but it is much lesslikely to be triggered by most drivingconditions. Off disables all ForwardCollision Alert and automaticbraking capabilities of the AutoCollision Preparation feature.

Select Off, Alert and Brake, or Alert.See ”Auto Collision Preparation” inObject Detection System Messageson page 5-33.

Park Assist

If equipped, this allows the featureto be turned on or off. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking on page 9-57.

Select Off, On, or On with TowbarAttached.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing may display:. Auto Memory Recall. Easy Exit Options. Chime Volume. Reverse Tilt Mirror. Auto Mirror Folding



Auto Memory Recall

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off.

Select On, Off.

Easy Exit Options

This allows the feature to be turnedon or off.

Select On or Off.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Press + or − to adjust the volume.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

When on, the driver and/orpassenger mirrors will tilt downwardwhen the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse) to improve visibility ofthe ground near the rear wheels.

Select Off, On - Driver andPassenger, On - Driver, or On -Passenger.

Auto Mirror Folding

When on, the outside rearviewmirrors will automatically fold orunfold when the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter Q or Kbutton is pressed and held.

Select Off or On.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing may display:. Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This feature will flash the exteriorlights when K on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter ispressed to locate the vehicle.

Select On or Off.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Select Off, 30 Seconds, 60Seconds, or 120 Seconds.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing may display:. Unlocked Door Anti-lockout. Auto Door Unlock. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti-lockout

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open and the key is in theignition. If Off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable.

Select On or Off.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Select Off, All Doors, or Driver Door.



Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. To override thedelay, press the power door lockswitch on the door.

Select On or Off.

Remote Lock, Unlock, Start

Select Remote Lock, Unlock, Startand the following may display:. Remote Unlock Light Feedback. Remote Lock Feedback. Remote Door Unlock. Remote Start Auto Cool Seats. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats. Passive Door Unlock. Passive Door Lock. Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Select Off or Flash Lights.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Select Off, Lights and Horn, LightsOnly, or Horn Only.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Select All Doors or DriverDoor Only.

Remote Start Auto Cool Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the cooled seats onwhen using remote start onwarm days.

Select Off or On.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

If equipped and turned on, thisfeature will turn the heated seats onwhen using remote start oncold days.

Select Off or On.

Passive Door Unlock

This allows the selection of whatdoors will unlock when using thebutton on the driver door to unlockthe vehicle.

Select All Doors or Driver Door.

Passive Door Lock

This allows passive locking to beturned on or off and selectsfeedback. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation onpage 2-3.

Select Off, On with HornChirp, or On.

Remote Left in Vehicle Alert

This feature sounds an alert whenthe RKE transmitter is left in thevehicle.

Select Off or On.



Bluetooth

Select and the following maydisplay:. Pair New Device. Device Management. Ringtones. Voice Mail Numbers

Pair New Device

Select to pair a new device. See“Pairing” in “Infotainment Controls”under Bluetooth in the infotainmentmanual.

Device Management

Select to connect to a differentphone source, disconnect a phone,or delete a phone.

Ringtones

Press to change the ring tone forthe specific phone. The phone doesnot need to be connected to changethe ring tone.

Voice Mail Numbers

This feature displays the voice mailnumber for all connected phones.To change the voice mail number,select EDIT or press the EDITbutton. Type a new number, thenselect SAVE or press the SAVEbutton.

Voice

Select and the following maydisplay:. Prompt Length. Audio Feedback Speed

Prompt Length

This feature adjusts the voiceprompt length.

Select Short or Long.

Audio Feedback Speed

This feature adjusts the audiofeedback speed.

Select Slow, Medium, or Fast.

Display

Select and the following maydisplay:. Calibrate Touchscreen. Turn Display Off

Calibrate Touchscreen

Select to calibrate the touchscreen,then follow the prompts.

Turn Display Off

Select to turn the display off. Pressanywhere on the display area or anyfaceplate button to turn thedisplay on.



Rear Camera

Select and the following maydisplay:. Guidance Lines. Rear Park Assist Symbols

Guidance Lines

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking on page 9-57.

Rear Park Assist Symbols

Select to turn Off or On. SeeAssistance Systems for Parking orBacking on page 9-57.

Return to Factory Settings

Select and the following maydisplay:. Restore Vehicle Settings. Clear All Private Data. Restore Radio Settings

Restore Vehicle Settings

This allows selection of restoringvehicle settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Clear All Private Data

This allows selection to clear allprivate information from the vehicle.

Select Delete or Cancel.

Restore Radio Settings

This allows selection to restoreradio settings.

Select Restore or Cancel.

Software Information

Select to view the infotainmentsystem current software information.

Universal RemoteSystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

Universal Remote SystemProgramming

If equipped, these buttons are in theoverhead console.

This system can replace up to threeremote control transmitters used toactivate devices such as garagedoor openers, security systems, andhome automation devices. Theseinstructions refer to a garage dooropener, but can be used for otherdevices.



Do not use the Universal Remotesystem with any garage door openerthat does not have the stop andreverse feature. This includes anygarage door opener modelmanufactured before April 1, 1982.

Read the instructions completelybefore programming the UniversalRemote system. It may help to haveanother person assist with theprogramming process.

Keep the original hand-heldtransmitter for use in other vehiclesas well as for future programming.Erase the programming whenvehicle ownership is terminated.See “Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons” later in thissection.

To program a garage door opener,park outside directly in line with andfacing the garage door openerreceiver. Clear all people andobjects near the garage door.

Make sure the hand-held transmitterhas a new battery for quick andaccurate transmission of theradio-frequency signal.

Programming the UniversalRemote System

For questions or help programmingthe Universal Remote system, call1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Programming involvestime-sensitive actions, and may timeout causing the procedure to berepeated.

To program up to three devices:

1. Hold the end of the hand-heldtransmitter about 3 to 8 cm (1 to3 in) away from the UniversalRemote system buttons with theindicator light in view. Thehand-held transmitter wassupplied by the manufacturer ofthe garage door opener receiver.

2. At the same time, press andhold both the hand-heldtransmitter button and one of thethree Universal Remote systembuttons to be used to operatethe garage door. Do not releaseeither button until the indicatorlight goes from a slow to a rapidflashing light. Then release bothbuttons.

Some garage door openers mayrequire substitution of Step 2with the procedure under “RadioSignals for Canada and SomeGate Operators” later in thissection.

3. Press and hold the newlyprogrammed Universal Remotesystem button for five secondswhile watching the indicator lightand garage door activation.



. If the indicator light stays oncontinuously or the garagedoor moves when thebutton is pressed, thenprogramming is complete.There is no need tocomplete Steps 4–6.

. If the indicator light doesnot come on or the garagedoor does not move, asecond button press maybe required. For a secondtime, press and hold thenewly programmed buttonfor five seconds. If the lightstays on or the garage doormoves, programming iscomplete.

. If the indicator light blinksrapidly for two seconds,then changes to a solid lightand the garage door doesnot move, continue withprogramming Steps 4–6.

Learn or Smart Button

4. After completing Steps 1–3,locate the Learn or Smart buttoninside the garage on the garagedoor opener receiver. The nameand color of the button may varyby manufacturer.

5. Press and release the Learn orSmart button. Step 6 must becompleted within 30 seconds ofpressing this button.

6. Inside the vehicle, press andhold the newly programmedUniversal Remote system buttonfor two seconds and thenrelease it. If the garage doordoes not move or the lamp onthe garage door opener receiver

does not flash, press and holdthe same button a second timefor two seconds, then release it.Again, if the door does not moveor the garage door lamp doesnot flash, press and hold thesame button a third time fortwo seconds, then release it.

The Universal Remote systemshould now activate thegarage door.

Repeat the process forprogramming the two remainingbuttons.

Radio Signals for Canada andSome Gate Operators

For questions or programming help,call 1-800-355-3515 or seewww.homelink.com.

Canadian radio-frequency laws andsome U.S. gate operators requiretransmitter signals to time out or quitafter several seconds oftransmission. This may not be long



enough for the Universal Remotesystem to pick up the signal duringprogramming.

If the programming did not work,replace Step 2 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System” withthe following:

Press and hold the UniversalRemote system button whilepressing and releasing thehand-held transmitter button everytwo seconds until the signal hasbeen successfully accepted by theUniversal Remote system. TheUniversal Remote system indicatorlight will flash slowly at first and thenrapidly. Proceed with Step 3 under“Programming the Universal RemoteSystem” to complete.

Universal Remote SystemOperation

Using the Universal RemoteSystem

Press and hold the appropriateUniversal Remote system button forat least one-half second. Theindicator light will come on while thesignal is being transmitted.

Erasing Universal RemoteSystem Buttons

Erase all programmed buttons whenvehicle ownership is terminated.

To erase:

1. Press and hold the two outsidebuttons until the indicator lightbegins to flash. This should takeabout 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

Reprogramming a SingleUniversal Remote SystemButton

To reprogram any of the systembuttons:

1. Press and hold any one of thebuttons. Do not release thebutton.

2. The indicator light will begin toflash after 20 seconds. Withoutreleasing the button, proceedwith Step 1 under “Programmingthe Universal Remote System.”



2 NOTES


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-4Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5AuxiliaryRoof-Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Battery Load Management . . . . 6-8Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-9

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theinstrument panel to the left of thesteering wheel.

O (Off): Turns off the automaticheadlamps and Daytime RunningLamps (DRL). Turn the headlampcontrol to the off position again toturn the automatic headlamps orDRL back on.

For vehicles first sold in Canada, offwill only work when the vehicle is inP (Park).


6-2 Lighting

AUTO (Automatic): Automaticallyturns on the headlamps at normalbrightness, together with thefollowing:. Parking Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Roof Marker Lamps (If

Equipped). Front/Rear Sidemarker Lamps

When the vehicle is turned off andthe headlamps are in AUTO, theheadlamps turn off. When the key isremoved, they automatically turn onfor a set time. The time of the delaycan be changed using the DIC. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC) onpage 5-26.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps including all lamps,except the headlamps.

2 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps together with the parkinglamps and instrument panel lights.

When the headlamps are turned onwhile the vehicle is on, theheadlamps turn off automatically10 minutes after the ignition isturned off. When the headlamps areturned on while the vehicle is off,the headlamps will stay on for10 minutes before turning off toprevent the battery from beingdrained. Turn the headlamp controloff and then back to the headlampon position to make the headlampsstay on for an additional 10 minutes.To keep the lamps on for more than10 minutes, the ignition must be inthe ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUNposition.

# (Fog Lamps) (If Equipped):Turns on the fog lamps. See FogLamps on page 6-5.

Exterior Lamps OffReminderA reminder chime sounds when theheadlamps or parking lamps aremanually turned on, the ignition isoff, and a door is open. To disablethe chime, turn the lamps off.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer$ (Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger): Push the turn signallever toward the instrument panel tochange the headlamps from low tohigh beam.

Pull the turn signal lever toward youand release it to return to low-beamheadlamps.


Lighting 6-3

When the high beams are on, thisindicator light on the instrumentcluster will also be on.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use thehigh-beam headlamps to signal adriver in front of you that you wantto pass. It works even if theheadlamps are in the automaticposition.

To use it, pull the turn signal levertoward you, then release it.

If the headlamps are in theautomatic position or on low beam,the high-beam headlamps will turnon. They will stay on as long as youhold the lever toward you. Thehigh-beam indicator on the

instrument cluster will come on.Release the lever to return tonormal operation.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)DRL can make it easier for others tosee the front of the vehicle duringthe day. Fully functional DRL arerequired on all vehicles first sold inCanada.

The DRL system comes on whenthe following conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamp control is

in AUTO.. The transmission is not in

P (Park).. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.

When the DRL system is on, onlythe DRL are on. The taillamps,sidemarker lamps, instrument panellights, and other lamps will notbe on.

When it begins to get dark, theautomatic headlamp systemswitches from DRL to theheadlamps.

To turn off the DRL, turn the exteriorlamp control to the off position andthen release. For vehicles first soldin Canada, off will only work whenthe vehicle is in P (Park).

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen the exterior lamp control isset to AUTO and it is dark enoughoutside, the headlamps come onautomatically.


6-4 Lighting

There is a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel. Do not cover thesensor, otherwise the headlampswill come on when they are notneeded.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps will turn off or maychange to Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

The automatic headlamp systemturns off when the exterior lampcontrol is turned to O or the ignitionis off.

Lights On with Wipers

If the windshield wipers areactivated in daylight with the engineon, and the exterior lamp control isin AUTO, the headlamps, parkinglamps, and other exterior lampscome on. The transition time for thelamps coming on varies based onwiper speed. When the wipers are

not operating, these lamps turn off.Move the exterior lamp control toPor; to disable this feature.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flashers):Press this button to make the frontand rear turn signal lamps flash onand off. Press again to turn theflashers off.

When the hazard warning flashersare on, the vehicle's turn signals willnot work.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument clusterflashes in the direction of the turn orlane change.

Move the turn signal lever all theway up or down to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever for lessthan one second until the arrowstarts to flash to signal a lanechange. This causes the turnsignals to automatically flash threetimes. It will flash six times if Tow/Haul Mode is active. Holding theturn signal lever for more than


Lighting 6-5

one second will cause the turnsignals to flash until the lever isreleased.

The lever returns to its startingposition whenever it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb couldbe burned out.

Replace any burned out bulbs. If abulb is not burned out, check thefuse. See Fuses on page 10-40.

Turn Signal On Chime

If the turn signal is left on for morethan 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chimesounds at each flash of the turnsignal. The message TURNSIGNAL ON will also appear in theDriver Information Center (DIC). Toturn the chime and message off,move the turn signal lever to the offposition.

Fog Lamps

The fog lamp control is on thecenter of the exterior lamp control,to the left of the steering column.

The ignition must be on for the foglamps to come on.

# (Fog Lamps): Press to turn thefog lamps on or off. A light will comeon in the instrument cluster.

When the fog lamps are turned on,the parking lamps automaticallyturn on.

When the headlamps are changedto high beam, the fog lamps also gooff. When the high-beam headlampsare turned off, the fog lamps willcome on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be on withthe fog lamps.

AuxiliaryRoof-Mounted LampIf equipped, this button includeswiring provisions for a dealer or aqualified service center to install anauxiliary roof lamp.

This button is on the overheadconsole.


6-6 Lighting

When the wiring is connected to anauxiliary roof-mounted lamp,pressing the bottom of the buttonwill activate the lamp and illuminatean indicator light at the bottom ofthis button. Pressing the top of thebutton will turn off the roof-mountedlamp and indicator.

The emergency roof lamp circuit isfused at 30 amps, so the totalcurrent draw of the attached lampsshould be less than this value. Theattachment points for the roof lampcircuits are two blunt cut wiresabove the overhead console: a darkgreen with blue stripe switchedpower wire and a black ground wire.

For more information onroof-mounted emergency lampinstallation, see the GM Upfitterwebsite at www.gmupfitter.com orcontact your dealer.

If the vehicle has this button, thevehicle may have the snow plowprep package. See Adding a SnowPlow or Similar Equipment onpage 9-90.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the steering wheel and instrumentpanel lights. The instrument panelillumination control is next to theexterior lamp control.

D (Instrument PanelIllumination): Move thethumbwheel up or down to brightenor dim the lights.

Cargo Lamp

The cargo lamp provides more lightin the cargo area of the vehicle,if needed. The lights inside of thepickup box also turn on, if equipped.

Press the switch down to turn thecargo lamp on or off. The shift levermust be in the P (Park) position tooperate the cargo lamp.


Lighting 6-7

Dome Lamps

There are dome lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped.

To change the dome lamp settings,press the following:

OFF: Turns the lamps off, evenwhen a door is open.

DOOR: The lamps come onautomatically when a door isopened.

ON: Turns all dome lamps on.

Reading LampsThere are reading lamps in theoverhead console and the headliner,if equipped. To operate, the ignitionmust be in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position or usingRetained Accessory Power (RAP).

Pressm orn next to each readinglamp to turn it on or off.


6-8 Lighting

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe vehicle has an illuminated entryfeature.

When a door is opened, the domelamps and puddle lamps come on ifthe dome lamp control is in theDOOR position. If the dome lampcontrol is in the OFF position, thelamps do not come on.

The headlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, and back-up lamps turnon briefly at night, or in areas withlimited lighting, when K is pressedon the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. After about 30 secondsthe exterior lamps turn off. Entrylighting can be disabled manually bychanging the ignition out of the OFFposition, or by pressing the RKEtransmitter Q button.

This feature can be changed. See“Vehicle Locator Lights” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5-39.

Exit LightingThe interior lamps, headlamps,parking lamps, back-up lamps, andlicense plate lamps come on whenthe key is removed from the ignition.The interior lamps turn offautomatically in 20 seconds. Theinterior lamps do not come on if thedome lamp control is in the OFFposition.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamps control off.

This feature can be changed. SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5-39.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM), whichestimates the battery's temperatureand state of charge. It then adjuststhe voltage for best performanceand extended life of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. The voltmetergauge or the voltage display on theDriver Information Center (DIC),if equipped, may show the voltagemoving up or down. This is normal.If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all thepower that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.


Lighting 6-9

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power, wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed and it is recommendedthat the driver reduce the electricalloads as much as possible. See“Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages” under Vehicle Messageson page 5-29.

Battery Power ProtectionThis feature shuts off the dome andreading lamps, if they are left on formore than 10 minutes after theignition is turned off. The cargolamp shuts off after 20 minutes. Thisprevents the battery fromrunning down.


6-10 Lighting

2 NOTES


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Introduction

InfotainmentSee the infotainment manual forinformation on the radio, audioplayers, phone, navigation system,and voice or speech recognition.It also includes information onsettings.


7-2 Infotainment System

2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Climate Control Systems

Dual Automatic Climate Control SystemWith this system the heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can becontrolled.

1. Driver Temperature Control

2. A/C (Air Conditioning)

3. Air Delivery Mode Controls

4. Fan Control

5. Defrost

6. Passenger Temperature Control

7. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

8. Air Recirculation

9. Power Button

10. Rear Window Defogger

11. SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature)


8-2 Climate Controls

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When the indicator light is on, thesystem is in full automatic operation.If the air delivery mode or fansetting is manually adjusted, theauto indicator turns off and displayswill show the selected settings.

To place the system inautomatic mode:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the driver and passengertemperature.

To find your comfort setting, startwith 22°C (72°F) and allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded for best comfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather.

The recirculation light will not comeon when automatically controlled.Press@ to manually selectrecirculation; press it again to selectoutside air.

Do not cover the solar sensor on thetop of the instrument panel near thewindshield. This sensor regulatesair temperature based on sun load.See “Sensors” later in this section.

Manual Operation

O (On/Off): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.Outside air still enters the vehicle,and is directed to the floor. Thisdirection can be changed bypressing the air delivery mode.

9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the fan speed. Press theknob to turn the fan off.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Driver and PassengerTemperature Control: Thetemperature can be adjustedseparately for the driver andpassenger.

Turn the knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase ordecrease the driver or passengertemperature setting.

SYNC (SynchronizedTemperature): Press to link thepassenger temperature setting tothe driver setting. The SYNCindicator light will turn on. When thepassenger setting is adjusted, theSYNC indicator light is off.

The driver side or passenger sidetemperature display shows thetemperature setting increasing ordecreasing.

Air Delivery Mode Control: PressY,\,[ , or- to change thedirection of the airflow. An indicatorlight comes on in the selected modebutton.



Changing the mode cancels theautomatic operation and the systemgoes into manual mode. PressAUTO to return to automaticoperation.

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-Level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument panel andfloor outlets. Some air is directedtoward the windshield and sidewindow outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets, with some to thewindshield, side window outlets, andsecond row floor outlets.

- (Defog): This mode clears thewindows of fog or moisture. Air isdirected to the windshield, flooroutlets, and side window vents. Thesystem automatically forces outsideair into the vehicle and the airconditioning compressor will run,unless the outside temperature isclose to freezing.

0 (Defrost): Press to clear thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and the side windowvents. The air conditioningcompressor also comes on, unlessthe outside temperature is belowfreezing.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

See Air Vents on page 8-5.

A/C (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning system onor off. An indicator light comes on toshow that the air conditioning isenabled. If the fan is turned off, theair conditioner will not run. The A/Clight will stay on even if the outsidetemperatures are below freezing.

@ (Recirculation): Press to turnon recirculation. An indicator lightcomes on. Air is recirculated toquickly cool the inside of thevehicle. It can also be used to helpreduce outside air and odors that

enter the vehicle. The airconditioning compressor also comeson when this mode is activated.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger uses awarming grid to remove fog from therear window.

K (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off. An indicator lighton the button comes on to show thatthe rear window defogger is on.

The rear window defogger onlyworks when the ignition is in ON/RUN. The rear window defoggerstays on for approximately10 minutes after the button is firstpressed. Each subsequent press,the rear window defogger stays onfor five minutes. The defogger alsoturns off if the ignition is turned toACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.



{ Caution

Using a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rearwindow can damage the rearwindow defogger. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not clear the insiderear window with sharp objects.

Heated Mirror: If equipped withheated outside rearview mirrors, themirrors heat to help clear fog or frostfrom the surface of the mirror whenthe rear window defog button ispressed. See Heated Mirrors onpage 2-15.

Sensors

The solar sensor, located in thedefrost grille in the middle of theinstrument panel, monitors the solarheat. Do not cover the solar sensoror the system will not work properly.

There is also an exteriortemperature sensor behind the frontgrille. This sensor reads the outsideair temperature and helps maintainthe temperature inside the vehicle.Any cover on the front of the vehicleincluding a snow plow, could causea false reading in the displayedtemperature.

The climate control system uses theinformation from these sensors tomaintain comfort settings byadjusting the outlet temperature, fanspeed, and the air delivery mode.The system may also supply coolerair to the side of the vehicle facingthe sun. The recirculation mode willalso be used as needed to maintaincool outlet temperatures.



Air VentsUse the air vents in the center andon the side of the instrument panelto direct airflow. Use thethumbwheels near the air vents toopen or close off the airflow.

Air vents blow warm air on the sidewindows in cold weather. If Floor,Defog or Defrost modes areselected, a small amount of air willcome from the vents close to thewindow. If the airflow is shut offusing the thumbwheels, warm airwill be directed to the otherinstrument panel vents. This isnormal operation.

Use the thumbwheels to turn ventairflow on or off based on the modeselected.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from air inlets at thebase of the windshield that couldblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non-GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.

Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3. To find out what type offilter to use, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11-15.



1. Open the lower glove box doorcompletely.

2. Remove the four screws fromaround the lower glove box. Thedoor does not need to beremoved to access the screws.

3. Close the lower glove box doorand pull from its frame toremove the entire unit.

4. Release the two tabs holding theservice door. Open the servicedoor and remove the old filter.

5. Install the new air filter.

6. Close the service door andsecure the tabs.

7. Reverse the steps to reinstall theglove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 9-11Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-12Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-14Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Truck-Camper LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-23Adjustable Throttle and BrakePedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Active Fuel Management® . . . 9-32

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-33Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

Drive SystemsFour-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-50

Ride Control SystemsTraction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

Hill DescentControl (HDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

Driver Assistance SystemsDriver AssistanceSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56

Assistance Systems forParking or Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-66California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-66Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66


9-2 Driving and Operating

E85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-69

Trailer TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-70

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-73Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80Trailer SwayControl (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-89

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90

Adding a Snow Plow orSimilar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . 9-90

Pickup Conversion toChassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-94

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ Warning

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem and the navigation system,if equipped, including pairing andusing a cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3-9.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ Warning

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three-quarters of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.



If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering (1500Series)

If the vehicle has electric powersteering, it does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort. See your dealer ifthere is a problem.

If the steering wheel is turned until itreaches the end of its travel, and isheld in that position for an extendedperiod of time, power steering assistmay be reduced.

If the steering assist is used for anextended period of time, powerassist may be reduced.

Normal use of the power steeringassist should return when thesystem cools down.

See specific vehicle steeringmessages under Steering SystemMessages on page 5-35.

Hydraulic Power Steering(2500/3500 Series)

If the vehicle has hydraulic powersteering, it may requiremaintenance. See Power SteeringFluid (2500/3500 Series) onpage 10-24 or Power Steering Fluid(1500 Series) on page 10-24.

If power steering assist is lostbecause the engine stops or asystem malfunctions, the vehiclecan be steered but may requireincreased effort.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

{ Caution

If the steering wheel is turneduntil it reaches the end of itstravel, and is held in that positionfor more than 15 seconds,damage may occur to the powersteering system and there may beloss of power steering assist.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.



. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve.

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Antilock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Turn the steering wheel to gostraight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering Skid —

too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip andlose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.



If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and steer theway you want the vehicle to go.The vehicle may straighten out.Be ready for a second skid if itoccurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingFour-wheel-drive vehicles can beused for off-road driving. Vehicleswithout four-wheel drive andvehicles not equipped with AllTerrain (AT) or On-Off Road (OOR)tires must not be driven off-roadexcept on a level, solid surface. Formore contact information about theoriginal equipment tires, see theLimited Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information manual.

One of the best ways for successfuloff-road driving is to control thespeed.

{ Warning

When driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in directioncan easily throw you out ofposition. This could cause you to

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

lose control and crash. You andyour passengers should alwayswear safety belts.

Before Driving Off-Road. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work completed.. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,

and check inflation pressure inall tires, including the spare,if equipped.

. Read all the information aboutfour-wheel-drive vehicles in thismanual.

. Remove any underbody airdeflector, if equipped. Re-attachthe air deflector after off-roaddriving.

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-road driving.



To gain more ground clearance ifneeded, it may be necessary toremove the front fascia lowerair dam.

{ Caution

Operating the vehicle forextended periods without the frontfascia lower air dam installed cancause improper air flow to theengine. Re-attach the front fasciaair dam after off-road driving.

Loading the Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ Warning

. Unsecured cargo on the loadfloor can be tossed aboutwhen driving over roughterrain. You or yourpassengers can be struck byflying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Keep cargo in the cargo areaas far forward and as low aspossible. The heaviest thingsshould be on the floor,forward of the rear axle.

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof.

For more information about loadingthe vehicle, see If the Vehicle IsStuck on page 9-14 and Tires onpage 10-48.

Environmental Concerns. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenset aside for public off-roadrecreational driving and obey allposted regulations.

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturbwildlife.

. Do not park over things thatburn. See Parking over ThingsThat Burn on page 9-32.

Driving on Hills

Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding ofwhat the vehicle can and cannot do.

{ Warning

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. Driving up hillscan cause the vehicle to stall.Driving down hills can cause lossof control. Driving across hills cancause a rollover. You could beinjured or killed. Do not drive onsteep hills.

Before driving on a hill, assess thesteepness, traction, andobstructions. If the terrain ahead



cannot be seen, get out of thevehicle and walk the hill beforedriving further.

When driving on hills:. Use a low gear and keep a firm

grip on the steering wheel.. Maintain a slow speed.. When possible, drive straight up

or down the hill.. Slow down when approaching

the top of the hill.. Use headlamps even during the

day to make the vehicle morevisible.

{ Warning

Driving to the top of a hill at highspeed can cause an accident.There could be a drop-off,embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could beseriously injured or killed. As younear the top of a hill, slow downand stay alert.

. Never go downhill forward orbackward with either thetransmission or transfer case inN (Neutral). The brakes couldoverheat and you could losecontrol.

{ Warning

If the vehicle has the two‐speedautomatic transfer case, shiftingthe transfer case to N (Neutral)can cause your vehicle to rolleven if the transmission is inP (Park). This is because theN (Neutral) position on thetransfer case overrides thetransmission. You or someoneelse could be injured. If leavingthe vehicle, set the parking brakeand shift the transmission toP (Park). Shift the transfer case toany position but N (Neutral).

. When driving down a hill, keepthe vehicle headed straightdown. Use a low gear becausethe engine will work with thebrakes to slow the vehicle andhelp keep the vehicle undercontrol.

{ Warning

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and you orothers could be injured or killed.Apply the brakes lightly whendescending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed undercontrol.

If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop thevehicle, and then apply theparking brake.



2. Shift into P (Park) and thenrestart the engine.. If driving uphill when the

vehicle stalls, shift toR (Reverse), release theparking brake, and backstraight down.

. Never try to turn the vehiclearound. If the hill is steepenough to stall the vehicle,it is steep enough to causeit to roll over.

. If you cannot make it up thehill, back straight downthe hill.

. Never back down a hill inN (Neutral) using only thebrake.

The vehicle can rollbackward quickly and youcould lose control.

. If driving downhill when thevehicle stalls, shift to alower gear, release theparking brake, and drivestraight down the hill.

3. If the vehicle cannot be restartedafter stalling, set the parkingbrake, shift into P (Park), andturn the vehicle off.

3.1. Leave the vehicle andseek help.

3.2. Stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

. Avoid turns that take the vehicleacross the incline of the hill.A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steep todrive across. Driving across anincline puts more weight on thedownhill wheels, which couldcause a downhill slide or arollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it — a rock, a rut,etc. — and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline moresevere. If a rock is driven acrosswith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

. If an incline must be drivenacross, and the vehicle starts toslide, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicleand prevent the side slipping.

{ Warning

Getting out of the vehicle on thedownhill side when stoppedacross an incline is dangerous.If the vehicle rolls over, you couldbe crushed or killed. Always getout on the uphill side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.



Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

Use a low gear when driving in mud— the deeper the mud, the lowerthe gear. Keep the vehicle movingto avoid getting stuck.

Traction changes when driving onsand. On loose sand, such as onbeaches or sand dunes, the tirestend to sink into the sand. Thisaffects steering, accelerating, andbraking. Drive at a reduced speedand avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers.

Traction is reduced on hard packedsnow and ice and it is easy to losecontrol. Reduce vehicle speed whendriving on hard packed snowand ice.

{ Warning

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous. Iceconditions vary greatly and the

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

vehicle could fall through the ice;you and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ Warning

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires.Traction could be lost, and thevehicle could roll over. Do notdrive through rushing water.

{ Caution

Do not drive through standingwater if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe. Deep water can damage theaxle and other vehicle parts.

If the standing water is not too deep,drive slowly through it. At fasterspeeds, water splashes and thevehicle can stall. When goingthrough water, the brakes get wetand it may take longer to stop. See“Driving on Wet Roads” later in thissection.

After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody orchassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, steering,



suspension, wheels, tires, andexhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

More frequent maintenance serviceis required. See the MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-3.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ Warning

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10-48.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.



Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ Warning

Using the brakes to slow thevehicle on a long downhill slopecan cause brake overheating, canreduce brake performance, andcould result in a loss of braking.Shift the transmission to a lowergear to let the engine assist thebrakes on a steep downhill slope.

{ Warning

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. This can causeoverheating of the brakes andloss of steering. Always have theengine running and the vehiclein gear.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills;something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain begins to fall,resulting in even less traction. Avoiddriving on wet ice or in freezing rainuntil roads can be treated with saltor sand.



Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

Traction Control should be turnedon. See Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control on page 9-50.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)improves vehicle stability duringhard stops on slippery roads, butapply the brakes sooner than whenon dry pavement. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) on page 9-48.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads are

clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.

Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use RoadsideAssistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13-5.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ Warning

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to get

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

inside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control Systems”.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-32.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restart

the vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See “Rocking the Vehicle to Get ItOut” later in this section.

The Traction Control System (TCS)can often help to free a stuckvehicle. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-50. If TCS cannot free thevehicle, see “Rocking the Vehicle toGet it Out” following.

{ Warning

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or other

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

damage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 56 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10-72.

Rocking the Vehicle to GetIt Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. For four-wheel-drivevehicles, shift into Four-Wheel DriveHigh. Turn the TCS off. Shift backand forth between R (Reverse) anda forward gear, spinning the wheelsas little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Slowly spinning the wheels inthe forward and reverse directions



causes a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10-87.Recovery hooks can be used, if thevehicle has them.

Recovery Hooks

{ Warning

Never pull on recovery hooksfrom the side. The hooks couldbreak and you and others couldbe injured. When using recoveryhooks, always pull the vehiclefrom the front.

{ Caution

Do not drive through standingwater if it is deep enough to coverthe wheel hubs, axles, or exhaustpipe. Deep water can damage theaxle and other vehicle parts.

There are recovery hooks at thefront of the vehicle. Use them if thevehicle is stuck off-road and needsto be pulled some place to continuedriving.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnon-factory-installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it wasdesigned to carry: the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification/Tire label.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

vehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the driver side

center B-pillar below the doorlock post. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (1), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (2) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thesize of the original equipmenttires (3) and the recommendedcold tire inflation pressures (4).For more information on tiresand inflation see Tires onpage 10-48 and Tire Pressureon page 10-57.

There is also important loadinginformation on the vehicleCertification/Tire label. It tellsyou the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) and the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axles. See“Certification/Tire Label” later inthis section.

“Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit–

1. Locate the statement "Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs." on your vehicle’splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the "XXX"amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo



and luggage load capacity is650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manualto determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.”

See Trailer Towing on page 9-73 forimportant information on towing atrailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

Example 1

1. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg (1,000 lb)

2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lb) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lb)

3. Available Occupant and CargoWeight = 317 kg (700 lb)

Example 2


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @68 kg (150 lb) × 5 = 136 kg(750 lb)

3. Available Cargo Weight = 113 kg(250 lb)



Example 3


2. Subtract Occupant Weight @91 kg (200 lb) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lb)

3. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lb)

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combined

weight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification/Tire Label

A vehicle-specific Certification/Tire label is label is attached tothe center pillar (B-pillar). Thelabel shows the size of thevehicle's original tires and theinflation pressures needed toobtain the gross weight capacityof the vehicle. This is calledGross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR). The GVWR includesthe weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells the maximum weights forthe front and rear axles, calledGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). To find out the actualloads on the front and rearaxles, go to a weigh station andweigh the vehicle. Your dealercan help you with this. Be sureto spread out the load equallyon both sides of the centerline.

Never exceed the GVWR for thevehicle, or the GAWR for eitherthe front or rear axle.

The Certification/Tire label alsocontains important informationabout the Front Axle ReserveCapacity.



{ Warning

In the case of a sudden stopor collision, things carried inthe bed of your truck couldshift forward and come intothe passenger area, injuringyou and others. If you putthings in the bed of your truck,you should make sure theyare properly secured.

{ Warning

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This could

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

cause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

{ Caution

Overloading the vehicle maycause damage. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not overload thevehicle.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change thevehicle's weight ratings. Askyour dealer to help you load thevehicle the right way.

If things are put inside thevehicle — like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything else —they go as fast as the vehicle

goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash,they will keep going.

{ Warning

Things you put inside thevehicle can strike and injurepeople in a sudden stop orturn, or in a crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. Try tospread the weight evenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. When you carry somethinginside the vehicle, secureit whenever you can.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless you need to.

There is also important loadinginformation for off-road driving inthis manual. See “Loading theVehicle for Off-Road Driving“under Off-Road Driving onpage 9-6.

Two-Tiered Loading

By positioning four 5 cm (2 in) by15 cm (6 in) wooden planksacross the width of the pickupbox, you can create an upperload platform. The planks mustbe inserted in the pickup boxdepressions. The length of the

planks must allow for at least a2 cm (0.75 in) bearing surface oneach end of the plank.

When using this upper loadplatform, be sure the load issecurely tied down to prevent itfrom shifting. The load's centerof gravity should be positionedin a zone over the rear axle. Thezone is located in the areabetween the front of each wheelwell and the rear of each wheelwell. The center of gravity heightmust not extend above the topof the pickup box flareboard.

Any load that extends beyondthe vehicle's taillamp area mustbe properly marked according tolocal laws and regulations.

Remember not to exceed theGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) of the front or rear axle.

Add-On Equipment

When carrying removable items, alimit on how many people carriedinside the vehicle may benecessary. Be sure to weigh thevehicle before you buy and installthe new equipment.

{ Caution

Overloading the vehicle maycause damage. Repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not overload thevehicle.



Remember not to exceed theGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) of the front or rear axle.

*EquipmentMaximumWeight

Ladder Rackand Cargo

340 kg (750 lb)

Cross Toolboxand Cargo

181 kg (400 lb)

Side Boxesand Cargo

113 kg perside (250 lbper side)

*The combined weight for allrail-mounted equipment shouldnot exceed 454 kg (1,000 lb).A reinforcement kit forrail-mounted add-on equipmentis recommended. See your GMdealer.

Loading Points

1. Primary Load Points

2. Secondary Load Areas

3. Cargo Management OptionHoles

Structural members (1) and (2) areincluded in the pickup box design.Additional accessories should usethese load points. Depending on theaccessory design, use a spacerunder the accessory at the loadpoints to remove gap. The holes forthe Cargo Management System (3)are not intended for attachment of

aftermarket equipment. Seewww.gmupfitter.com for additionalpickup box load bearing structuralinformation.

Truck-Camper LoadingInformationA vehicle-specific Truck-CamperLoading Information label isattached to the inside of thevehicle's glove box. This labelindicates if a slide-in campercan be carried, how much of aload the vehicle can carry, andhow to correctly spread out theload. It will help to match theright slide-in camper to thevehicle.

Your dealer can help make agood vehicle-camper match andhelp determine the CargoWeight Rating (CWR).

When installing and loading aslide-in camper, check themanufacturer's instructions.



When carrying a slide-incamper, the total cargo load ofthe vehicle is the weight of thecamper plus:. Everything added to the

camper after it left thefactory.

. Everything in the camper.

. All the people inside.

The CWR is the maximumweight of the load the vehiclecan carry. It does not include theweight of the people inside. But,use about 68 kg (150 lb) foreach seat.

The total cargo load must not bemore than the vehicle's CWR.

Refer to the Truck-CamperLoading Information label in theglove box for dimensions 1 and2 as shown in the followingillustration.

Use the rear edge of the loadfloor for measurement purposes.The recommended location forthe cargo center of gravity is atpoint 3 for the CWR. It is thepoint where the mass of a bodyis concentrated and,if suspended at that point, wouldbalance the front and rear.

Here is an example of propertruck and camper match:

1. Camper Center of Gravity

2. Recommended Center ofGravity Location Zone

When the truck is used to carrya slide-in camper, the total cargoload of the truck consists of themanufacturer's camper weightfigure, the weight of installedadditional camper equipment notincluded in the manufacturer'scamper weight figure, the weight



of camper cargo, and the weightof passengers in the camper.The total cargo load should notexceed the truck's cargo weightrating, and the camper's centerof gravity (1) should fall withinthe truck's recommended centerof gravity zone (2) wheninstalled.

Any accessories or otherequipment that are added to thevehicle must be weighed. Then,subtract this extra weight fromthe CWR. This extra weight mayshorten the center of gravityzone of the vehicle.

If the slide-in camper and itsload weighs less than the CWR,the center of gravity zone for thevehicle may be larger.

Secure loose items to preventweight shifts that could affect thebalance of the vehicle. When thetruck-camper is loaded, drive toa scale and weigh on the front

and on the rear wheelsseparately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loadsshould not exceed either of thegross axle weight ratings(GAWR). The total axle loadsshould not exceed the vehicle'sgross vehicle weight rating(GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the Certification/Tirelabel attached to the B-pillar.See “Certification/Tire Label”under Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15. If weight ratings areexceeded, move or removeitems to bring all weights belowthe ratings.

See your dealer for moreinformation on curb weights,cargo weights, Cargo WeightRating, and the correct center ofgravity zone.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-In

{ Caution

The vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it willperform better in the long run ifyou follow these guidelines:

. Keep the vehicle speed at88 km/h (55 mph) or less forthe first 805 km (500mi).

. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500 mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yet

(Continued)



Caution (Continued)

broken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See Trailer Towingon page 9-73 for the trailertowing capabilities of thevehicle and more information.

Following break-in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Adjustable Throttle andBrake PedalIf equipped, the position of thethrottle and brake pedals can bechanged.

No adjustment to the pedals can bemade when the vehicle is inR (Reverse) or while using cruisecontrol.

The switch used to adjust thepedals is on the center stack, belowthe climate controls.

Lift the switch up to move thepedals closer to your body. Pressthe switch down to move thepedals away.

Before you start driving, fully pressthe brake pedal to confirm theadjustment is right for you. Whiledriving, make only smalladjustments.

The vehicle may have a memoryfunction, which lets pedal settingsbe saved and recalled. See MemorySeats on page 3-5.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.



To shift out of P (Park), the ignitionmust be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brakepedal must be applied.

1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is stopped,turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9-29.

This position locks the ignition andsteering wheel. It also locks thetransmission on automatictransmission vehicles. The key canbe removed in LOCK/OFF.

The steering can bind with thewheels turned off center. If thishappens, move the steering wheelfrom right to left while turning thekey to ACC/ACCESSORY. If thisdoes not work, then the vehicleneeds service.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9-49.

{ Warning

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

{ Caution

Using a tool to force the key toturn in the ignition could causedamage to the switch or break thekey. Use the correct key, makesure it is all the way in, and turn itonly with your hand. If the keycannot be turned by hand, seeyour dealer.



2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition lets things like the radioand the windshield wipers operatewhile the engine is off. It alsounlocks the steering wheel. Use thisposition if the vehicle must bepushed or towed.

3 (ON/RUN): This position can beused to operate the electricalaccessories and to display someinstrument cluster warning andindicator lights. This position canalso be used for service anddiagnostics, and to verify the properoperation of the malfunctionindicator lamp as may be requiredfor emission inspection purposes.The switch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running. Thetransmission is also unlocked in thisposition on automatic transmissionvehicles.

If the key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN positionwith the engine off, the battery couldbe drained. The vehicle may notstart if the battery is allowed to drainfor an extended period of time.

4 (START): This is the position thatstarts the engine. When the enginestarts, release the key. The ignitionswitch returns to ON/RUN fordriving.

A warning tone will sound when thedriver door is opened and theignition is in ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF, and the key is in theignition.

Starting the EngineIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

{ Caution

Do not try to shift to P (Park) if thevehicle is moving. If you do, youcould damage the transmission.Shift to P (Park) only when thevehicle is stopped.

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart theengine when the vehicle is alreadymoving, use N (Neutral) only.

{ Caution

If you add electrical parts oraccessories, you could changethe way the engine operates. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.See Add-On Electrical Equipmenton page 9-90.



Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as the engine getswarm. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent gear

damage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch to theACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF position.

When the low fuel warning lightis on and the FUEL LEVEL LOWmessage is displayed in theDriver Information Center (DIC),the Computer-ControlledCranking System is disabled toprevent possible vehiclecomponent damage. When thishappens, hold the ignition switchin the START position tocontinue engine cranking.

{ Caution

Cranking the engine for longperiods of time, by returning theignition to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damage

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

the cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especiallyin very cold weather (below−18°C or 0°F), it could beflooded with too much gasoline.Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor andholding it there while holding thekey in START for up to15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cooldown. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, do the samething. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate the



engine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Fast Idle SystemIf equipped, this feature is availableonly with cruise control. The manualfast idle switch is operated using thecruise control buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel.

This system can be used toincrease engine idle speedwhenever the following conditionsare met:. The parking brake is set.. The brake pedal is not pressed.. The vehicle must not be moving

and the accelerator must not bepressed.

To control the fast idle:. To enable the Fast Idle System,

press and release the cruisecontrol on/off button and ensurethat the switch indicator lightis lit.

. Press and release the cruisecontrol SET- button. Enginespeed will be held atapproximately 1200 rpm.

One of the following actions will turnoff the fast idle:. Pressing the brake.. Selecting the cruise control

cancel button.. Releasing the parking brake.. Moving the transmission shift

lever out of P (Park) orN (Neutral).

. Selecting the cruise control on/off button when it waspreviously on.

. Pressing the cruise control SET-button a second time.

. Pressing the accelerator morethan one-quarter of theway down.

. Turning the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

Engine HeaterThe engine heater can provideeasier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up incold weather conditions at or below−18°C (0°F). Vehicles with anengine heater should be plugged inat least four hours before starting.An internal thermostat in theplug-end of the cord may exist,which will prevent engine coolantheater operation at temperaturesabove −18°C (0°F).


To Use the Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The cord issecured to the driver side fenderwith a clip, next to the enginecompartment fuse block.



Carefully remove the wire tiethat bundles the electrical plug.Do not cut the electrical cord.

3. Plug the cord into a normal,grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

{ Warning

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not, it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)The following vehicle accessoriescan be used for up to 10 minutesafter the engine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. OnStar System (if equipped). Sunroof (if equipped)

These features work when the keyis in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,the windows and sunroof continueto work up to 10 minutes or until anydoor is opened. The radio continuesto work for up to 10 minutes or untilthe driver door is opened.

Accessory Power Outlets (APOs)

The vehicle may have APOs inseveral locations. See PowerOutlets on page 5-5.

The APOs in the console or centerseat position are powered by RAP.They will continue to work for up to10 minutes after the key is turnedfrom ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, or untilthe driver door is opened.

The APOs on the center stack comefrom the factory powered directlyfrom the vehicle battery, and supplyaccessory power at all times,regardless of ignition key position.

If electronic items are left pluggedinto these APOs for long periods oftime with the vehicle off, the vehiclebattery could be drained. Thevehicle may not start if the battery isallowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.



Shifting Into Park

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If the vehicle has afour-wheel drive transfer casewith a N (Neutral) position, andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll,even if the shift lever is inP (Park). Be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear. If towing atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9-70.

1. Hold the brake pedal down, thenset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake onpage 9-49.

2. Move the shift lever into theP (Park) position by pulling theshift lever toward you andmoving it up as far as it will go.

3. Be sure the transfer case is in adrive gear— not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

5. Remove the key and take it withyou. If you can leave the vehiclewith the ignition key in yourhand, the vehicle is in P (Park).

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenly

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

if the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set.

If you have four-wheel drive andthe transfer case is in N (Neutral),the vehicle will be free to roll,even if the shift lever is inP (Park). So be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear — not inN (Neutral).

And, if you leave the vehicle withthe engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. Youor others could be injured. Do notleave the vehicle with the enginerunning unless you have to.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, be sure thevehicle is in P (Park) and theparking brake is firmly set beforeyou leave it. After you move the shiftlever into P (Park), hold the regularbrake pedal down. Then, see if you



can move the shift lever away fromP (Park) without first pulling it towardyou. If you can, it means that theshift lever was not fully locked intoP (Park).

Torque Lock

If you are parking on a hill and youdo not shift the transmission intoP (Park) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. You may find it difficultto pull the shift lever out of P (Park).This is called torque lock. Toprevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into P (Park)properly before you leave the driverseat. To find out how, see ShiftingInto Park on page 9-30.

When you are ready to drive, movethe shift lever out of P (Park) beforeyou release the parking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you mayneed to have another vehicle pushyours a little uphill to take some ofthe pressure from the parking pawl

in the transmission. You will then beable to pull the shift lever out ofP (Park).

Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anelectronic shift lock release system.The shift lock release isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park).

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park), unless theignition is in ON/RUN and theregular brake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9 volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10-83.

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Ease the pressure on the shiftlever.

2. While holding down the brakepedal, press the shift lever allthe way into P (Park).

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If you are still having a problemshifting, then have the vehicleserviced soon.



Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ Warning

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Active Fuel Management®

Vehicles with V8 engines may haveActive Fuel Management. Thissystem allows the engine to operateon either all or half of its cylinders,depending on the driving conditions.

When less power is required, suchas cruising at a constant vehiclespeed, the system will operate inthe half cylinder mode, allowing thevehicle to achieve better fueleconomy. When greater powerdemands are required, such asaccelerating from a stop, passing,or merging onto a freeway, thesystem will maintain full-cylinderoperation.

If the vehicle has an Active FuelManagement indicator, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-26 for more information onusing this display.

Engine Exhaust

{ Warning

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damaged,or improperly repaired.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running.

If the vehicle is left with the enginerunning, follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will not move.See Shifting Into Park on page 9-30and Engine Exhaust on page 9-32.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9-70.

AutomaticTransmissionIf equipped, there is an electronicshift lever position indicator withinthe instrument cluster. This displaycomes on when the ignition key isturned to the ON/RUN position.

There are several different positionsfor the shift lever.

Heavy-Duty 6-Speed AutomaticTransmission Shown, Light-Duty

6-Speed Similar

See “Range Selection Mode” underManual Mode on page 9-36.

P (Park): This position locks therear wheels. It is the best position touse when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannot moveeasily. When parked on a hill,



especially when the vehicle has aheavy load, you might notice anincrease in the effort to shift out ofP (Park). See “Torque Lock” underShifting Into Park on page 9-30.

{ Warning

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehiclecan move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9-30 and DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tipson page 9-70.

{ Warning

If you have four-wheel drive, thevehicle will be free to roll— evenif the shift lever is in P (Park)— ifthe transfer case is in N (Neutral).So, be sure the transfer case is ina drive gear, Two-Wheel DriveHigh or Four-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive Low— not inN (Neutral). See Shifting Into Parkon page 9-30.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

{ Caution

Shifting to R (Reverse) while thevehicle is moving forward coulddamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Shift toR (Reverse) only after the vehicleis stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-14.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart when you arealready moving, use N (Neutral)only. Also, use N (Neutral) when thevehicle is being towed.

{ Warning

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.



{ Caution

Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than about 55 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 55 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

By doing this, the vehicle shiftsdown to the next gear and hasmore power.

D (Drive) can be used when towinga trailer, carrying a heavy load,driving on steep hills, or drivingoff-road. Shift the transmission to alower gear selection if thetransmission shifts too often.

Downshifting the transmission inslippery road conditions could resultin skidding. See “Skidding” underLoss of Control on page 9-5.

The vehicle has a shift stabilizationfeature that adjusts the transmissionshifting to the current drivingconditions in order to reduce rapidupshifts and downshifts. This shiftstabilization feature is designed todetermine, before making anupshift, if the engine is able tomaintain vehicle speed by analyzingthings such as vehicle speed,throttle position, and vehicle load.If the shift stabilization featuredetermines that a current vehiclespeed cannot be maintained, thetransmission does not upshift andinstead holds the current gear.

In some cases, this could appear tobe a delayed shift, however thetransmission is operating normally.

The transmission uses adaptiveshift controls. The adaptive shiftcontrol process continuallycompares key shift parameters topre-programmed ideal shifts storedin the transmission’s computer. Thetransmission constantly makesadjustments to improve vehicleperformance according to how thevehicle is being used, such as witha heavy load or when thetemperature changes. During thisadaptive shift control process,shifting might feel different as thetransmission determines the bestsettings.

When temperatures are very cold,the transmission's gear shiftingcould be delayed providing morestable shifts until the engine warmsup. Shifts could be more noticeablewith a cold transmission. Thisdifference in shifting is normal.



M (Manual Mode): This positionallows selection of a range of gearsappropriate for current drivingconditions. If equipped, see “RangeSelection Mode” under ManualMode on page 9-36.

{ Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedalmay damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakesto hold the vehicle in place.

Normal Mode Grade Braking

If equipped with a gasoline engineand an automatic transmission,Normal Mode Grade Braking isenabled when the vehicle is started,

but is not enabled in RangeSelection Mode. It assists inmaintaining desired vehicle speedswhen driving on downhill grades byusing the engine and transmissionto slow the vehicle. The first timethe system engages for eachignition key cycle, a DIC messagewill be displayed. See TransmissionMessages on page 5-36.

To disable or enable Normal ModeGrade Braking within the currentignition key cycle, press and holdthe Tow/Haul button forfive seconds. When the button isreleased, the requested modechange is made. A DIC messagedisplays. See TransmissionMessages on page 5-36.

For other forms of grade braking,see Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-38and Cruise Control on page 9-53.

Manual Mode

Range Selection Mode

If equipped, Range Selection Modehelps control the vehicle'stransmission and vehicle speedwhile driving downhill or towing atrailer by letting you select a desiredrange of gears.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus buttons onthe shift lever to select thedesired range of gears forcurrent driving conditions.



When the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to M (Manual Mode), anumber displays next to the M,indicating the current transmissionrange.

This number is the highest gear thatthe transmission will command whileoperating in M (Manual Mode). Allgears below that number areavailable. As driving conditionschange, the transmission canautomatically shift to lower gears.For example, when M5 is selected,1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears areautomatically shifted by thetransmission, but 6 (Sixth) cannot beused until the plus/minus button onthe shift lever is used to change tothe range.

In vehicles with gasoline engines,when the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to M (Manual Mode), adownshift may occur. The gear thatthe transmission is operating inwhen the shift lever is moved fromD (Drive) to M (Manual Mode)determines if a downshift occurs.

See the following chart.

Gear before shifting from D(Drive) to M (Manual Mode)

6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st

Range after shifting from D(Drive) to M (Manual Mode)

M4 M4 M3 M2 M2 M1

Grade Braking is not available whenRange Selection Mode is active.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-38.

While using Range Selection Mode,cruise control and the Tow/HaulMode can be used.

If the vehicle has an exhaust brake,it can also be used, but will notautomatically downshift thetransmission. See “Exhaust Brake”in the Duramax diesel supplement.

{ Caution

Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hillusing only the accelerator pedal

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

may damage the transmission.The repair will not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. If you arestuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakesto hold the vehicle in place.

Low Traction Mode

Low Traction Mode assists invehicle acceleration when roadconditions are slippery, such as withice or snow. While the vehicle is at astop, select M2 using RangeSelection Mode. This will limittorque to the wheels and help toprevent the tires from spinning.



Tow/Haul Mode

The vehicle has a Tow/Haul Mode.The Tow/Haul Mode adjusts thetransmission shift pattern to reduceshift cycling, providing increasedperformance, vehicle control, andtransmission cooling when drivingdown steep hills or mountaingrades, towing, or hauling heavyloads.

The selector button is on the end ofthe shift lever. Turn the Tow/HaulMode on and off by pressing thebutton. When the Tow/Haul Mode isenabled, a light on the instrumentcluster will come on.

See Tow/Haul Mode Light onpage 5-21 and Hill and MountainRoads on page 9-12.

Also see “Tow/Haul Mode” underTowing Equipment on page 9-80.

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking

Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking isonly enabled while the Tow/HaulMode is selected and the vehicle isnot in the Range Selection Mode.See “Tow/Haul Mode” listedpreviously and Manual Mode onpage 9-36. Tow/Haul Mode GradeBraking assists in maintainingdesired vehicle speeds when drivingon downhill grades by using theengine and transmission to slow thevehicle.

On vehicles with a gasoline engine,to disable or enable Tow/HaulGrade Braking within the currentignition key cycle, press and holdthe Tow/Haul button forfive seconds. When the button isreleased, the requested modechange is made. A DIC message isdisplayed. See TransmissionMessages on page 5-36.

On vehicles with a diesel engine,Tow/Haul Mode Grade Braking canbe enabled or disabled by pressingthe Tow/Haul Mode button. Use theexhaust brake and Tow/Haul Modefor maximum grade braking.

See Towing Equipment onpage 9-80.

For other forms of grade braking,see Automatic Transmission onpage 9-33 and Cruise Control onpage 9-53.



Drive Systems

Four-Wheel DriveIf equipped, you can send theengine's driving power to all fourwheels for extra traction. To get themost satisfaction out of four-wheeldrive, you must be familiar with itsoperation. Read the following beforeusing four-wheel drive. See theappropriate text for the transfer casein the vehicle.

{ Caution

Driving on clean, dry pavement inFour-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive Low for anextended period of time maycause premature wear on thevehicle's powertrain. Do not driveon clean, dry pavement inFour-Wheel Drive High orFour-Wheel Drive Low forextended periods of time.

While driving on clean, drypavement and during tight turns,you may experience vibration in thesteering system.

Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Lowwill turn Traction Control andStabiliTrak® off. See TractionControl/Electronic Stability Controlon page 9-50.

Front Axle

The front axle engages anddisengages automatically when youshift the transfer case. Some delayfor the axle to engage or disengageis normal.


The transfer case knob is next tothe steering column.

Use the dial to shift into and out offour-wheel drive.

Indicator lights show which settingthe transfer case is in. Two-WheelDrive High, Four-Wheel Drive High,and Four-Wheel Drive Low areindicated through the outer ring ofthe transfer case knob. N (Neutral)is indicated on the face of the knob.The indicator lights will displaybriefly when you turn on the ignition



and one will stay on. If no lightsdisplay, take the vehicle to yourdealer for service. If the lightsdisplay momentarily when theignition is in ON/RUN, but none stayon, the knob may have been turnedwhile the vehicle was off. To see theindicator, turn the knob to anotherposition so that it matches theactual transfer case setting.

An indicator light flashes whileshifting the transfer case andremains illuminated when the shift iscomplete. If the transfer casecannot make a requested shift, it willreturn to the last chosen setting.The knob will need to be turnedback to the previous transfer casesetting in order to see the indicator.

Choose among four driving settings:

2m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations. Thefront axle is not engaged intwo-wheel drive. This setting alsoprovides the best fuel economy.

4m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Usethe Four-Wheel Drive High positionwhen extra traction is needed, suchas on snowy or icy roads or in mostoff-road situations. This setting alsoengages the front axle to help drivethe vehicle. This is the best settingto use when plowing snow.

4n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): Thissetting also engages the front axleand delivers extra torque. You maynever need this setting. It sendsmaximum power to all four wheels.You might choose Four-Wheel DriveLow while driving off-road in deepsand, deep mud, or deep snow, andwhile climbing or descending steephills.

Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Lowwill turn Traction Control andStabiliTrak off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-50.

{ Warning

Shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or someone elsecould be seriously injured. Besure to set the parking brakebefore placing the transfer case inN (Neutral). See Parking Brake onpage 9-49.

N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle'stransfer case to N (Neutral) onlywhen towing the vehicle. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10-88 or Towing the Vehicleon page 10-87.

If the SERVICE 4WD messagestays on, take the vehicle to yourdealer for service. See “SERVICE4WD” under TransmissionMessages on page 5-36.



Shifting Into Four-WheelDrive High

Turn the knob to the Four-WheelDrive High position. This can bedone at any speed up to 121 km/h(75 mph), except when shifting fromFour-Wheel Drive Low. Theindicator light will flash whileshifting. It will remain on when theshift is completed.

Shifting Into Two-WheelDrive High

Turn the knob to the Two-WheelDrive High position. This can bedone at any speed, except whenshifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low.See “Shifting Out of Four-WheelDrive Low” later in this section.

Shifting Into Four-WheelDrive Low

When Four-Wheel Drive Low isengaged, vehicle speed should bekept below 72 km/h (45 mph).Extended high-speed operation inFour-Wheel Drive Low may damageor shorten the life of the drivetrain.

To shift to the Four-Wheel DriveLow position, the ignition must be inON/RUN and the vehicle must bestopped or moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph) with the transmission inN (Neutral). The preferred methodfor shifting into Four-Wheel DriveLow is to have the vehicle moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn theknob to the Four-Wheel Drive Lowposition. You must wait for theFour-Wheel Drive Low indicator lightto stop flashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

{ Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested modeindicator light has stoppedflashing could damage thetransfer case. To help avoiddamaging the vehicle, always waitfor the mode indicator lights tostop flashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

It is typical for the vehicle to exhibitsignificant engagement noise andbump when shifting betweenFour-Wheel Drive Low andFour-Wheel Drive High ranges orfrom transfer case N (Neutral) withthe engine running.

If the knob is turned to theFour-Wheel Drive Low positionwhen the vehicle is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicatorlight will flash for 30 seconds andnot complete the shift. After30 seconds the transfer case willshift to Four-Wheel DriveHigh mode. In this case, the knobwill need to be turned to theFour-Wheel Drive High position inorder to see the indicator. With thevehicle moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph), and the transmission inN (Neutral), attempt the shift again.



Shifting Out of Four-WheelDrive Low

To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Lowto Four-Wheel Drive High orTwo-Wheel Drive High, the vehiclemust be stopped or moving lessthan 5 km/h (3 mph) with thetransmission in N (Neutral) and theignition in ON/RUN. The preferredmethod for shifting out ofFour-Wheel Drive Low is to havethe vehicle moving 1.6 to 3.2 km/h(1 to 2 mph). Turn the knob to theFour-Wheel Drive High orTwo-Wheel Drive High position. Youmust wait for the Four-Wheel DriveHigh or Two-Wheel Drive Highindicator light to stop flashing beforeshifting the transmission into gear.

{ Caution

Shifting the transmission into gearbefore the requested modeindicator light has stoppedflashing could damage the

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

transfer case. To help avoiddamaging the vehicle, always waitfor the mode indicator lights tostop flashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

It is typical for the vehicle to exhibitsignificant engagement noise andbump when shifting betweenFour-Wheel Drive Low andFour-Wheel Drive High ranges orfrom transfer case N (Neutral) withthe engine running.

If the knob is turned to theFour-Wheel Drive High orTwo-Wheel Drive High switchposition when the vehicle is in gearand/or moving more than5 km/h (3 mph), the Four-WheelDrive High or Two-Wheel Drive Highindicator light will flash for30 seconds, but will not completethe shift. With the vehicle moving

less than 5 km/h (3 mph), and thetransmission in N (Neutral), attemptthe shift again.

Shifting into N (Neutral)

To shift the transfer case toN (Neutral):

1. Make sure the vehicle is parkedso that it will not roll.

2. Set the parking brake and pressand hold the regular brakepedal. See Parking Brake onpage 9-49.

3. Start the vehicle or turn theignition to ON/RUN.

4. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

5. Shift the transfer case toTwo-Wheel Drive High.

6. Turn the transfer case dialclockwise to N (Neutral) until itstops and hold it there until theN (Neutral) light starts blinking.This will take at least10 seconds. Then slowly releasethe dial to the Four-Wheel Drive



Low position. The N (Neutral)light will come on when thetransfer case shift to N (Neutral)is complete.

7. If the engine is running, verifythat the transfer case is inN (Neutral) by shifting thetransmission to R (Reverse) forone second, then shift thetransmission to D (Drive) forone second.

8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will turn theengine off.

9. Place the transmission shiftlever in P (Park).

10. Release the parking brake priorto moving the vehicle.


Shifting Out of N (Neutral)

To shift the transfer case out ofN (Neutral):

1. Set the parking brake and applythe regular brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off, and shift thetransmission to N (Neutral).

3. Turn the transfer case dial toTwo-Wheel Drive High.

After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theN (Neutral) light will go out.


{ Caution


5. Start the engine and shift thetransmission to the desiredposition.


The transfer case knob is next tothe steering column.

Use the dial to shift into and out offour-wheel drive.

Indicator lights show which settingthe transfer case is in. Two-WheelDrive High, Automatic Four-WheelDrive, Four-Wheel Drive High, andFour-Wheel Drive Low are indicatedthrough the outer ring of the transfercase knob. N (Neutral) is indicatedon the face of the knob. Theindicator lights will display briefly



when you turn on the ignition andone will stay on. If no lights display,take the vehicle to your dealer forservice. If the lights displaymomentarily when the ignition is inON/RUN, but none stay on, theknob may have been turned whilethe vehicle was off. To see theindicator, turn the knob to anotherposition so that it matches theactual transfer case setting.

An indicator light flashes whileshifting the transfer case andremains illuminated when the shift iscomplete. If the transfer casecannot make a requested shift, it willreturn to the last chosen setting.The knob will need to be turnedback to the previous transfer casesetting in order to see the indicator.

Choose among five driving settings:

2m (Two-Wheel Drive High): Thissetting is used for driving in moststreet and highway situations. Thefront axle is not engaged intwo-wheel drive. This setting alsoprovides the best fuel economy.

AUTO (Automatic Four-WheelDrive): This setting is ideal for usewhen road surface tractionconditions are variable. Whendriving the vehicle in AUTO, thefront axle is engaged, and thevehicle's power is sent to the frontand rear wheels automaticallybased on driving conditions. Drivingin this mode results in slightly lowerfuel economy than Two-WheelDrive High.

Do not use AUTO mode to park ona steep grade with poor tractionsuch as ice, snow, mud or gravel. InAUTO mode only the rear wheelswill hold the vehicle from slidingwhen parked. If parking on a steepgrade, use 4 m to keep all fourwheels engaged.

4m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Usethis position when extra traction isneeded, such as on snowy or icyroads or in most off-road situations.This setting also engages the front

axle to help drive the vehicle. This isthe best setting to use whenplowing snow.

4n (Four-Wheel Drive Low): Thissetting also engages the front axleand delivers extra torque. You maynever need this setting. It sendsmaximum power to all four wheels.You might choose Four-Wheel DriveLow if you are driving off-road indeep sand, deep mud, or deepsnow, and while climbing ordescending steep hills.

Shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Lowwill turn Traction Control andStabiliTrak off. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-50.

{ Warning

Shifting the transfer case toN (Neutral) can cause the vehicleto roll even if the transmission isin P (Park). You or someone else

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

could be seriously injured. Besure to set the parking brakebefore placing the transfer case inN (Neutral). See Parking Brake onpage 9-49.

N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle'stransfer case to N (Neutral) onlywhen towing the vehicle. SeeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10-88 or Towing the Vehicleon page 10-87.

If the SERVICE 4WD messagestays on, take the vehicle to yourdealer for service. See “SERVICE4WD” under TransmissionMessages on page 5-36.

Shifting Into Four-Wheel DriveHigh or AUTO (AutomaticFour-Wheel Drive)

Turn the knob to the Four-WheelDrive High or AUTO position. Thiscan be done at any speed, exceptwhen shifting from Four-Wheel

Drive Low. The indicator light willflash while shifting. It will remain onwhen the shift is completed.

Shifting Into Two-WheelDrive High

Turn the knob to the Two-WheelDrive High position. This can bedone at any speed, except whenshifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low.The indicator light will flash whileshifting. It will remain on when theshift is completed.

Shifting Into Four-WheelDrive Low

When Four-Wheel Drive Low isengaged, vehicle speed should bekept below 72 km/h (45 mph).Extended high-speed operation inFour-Wheel Drive Low may damageor shorten the life of the drivetrain.

To shift to the Four-Wheel DriveLow position, the ignition must be inON/RUN and the vehicle must bestopped or moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph) with the transmission inN (Neutral). The preferred method

for shifting into Four-Wheel DriveLow is to have the vehicle moving1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn theknob to the Four-Wheel Drive Lowposition. You must wait for theFour-Wheel Drive Low indicator lightto stop flashing before shifting thetransmission into gear.

{ Caution


It is typical for the vehicle to exhibitsignificant engagement noise andbump when shifting betweenFour-Wheel Drive Low andFour-Wheel Drive High ranges orfrom N (Neutral) with the enginerunning.



If the knob is turned to theFour-Wheel Drive Low positionwhen the vehicle is in gear and/ormoving more than 5 km/h (3 mph),the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicatorlight will flash for 30 seconds andnot complete the shift. After30 seconds the transfer case willshift to Four-Wheel DriveHigh mode. In this case, the knobwill need to be turned to theFour-Wheel Drive High position inorder to see the indicator. With thevehicle moving less than 5 km/h(3 mph), and the transmission inN (Neutral), attempt the shift again.

Shifting Out of Four-WheelDrive Low

To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Lowto Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO,or Two-Wheel Drive High, thevehicle must be stopped or movingless than 5 km/h (3 mph) with thetransmission in N (Neutral) and theignition in ON/RUN. The preferredmethod for shifting out ofFour-Wheel Drive Low is to havethe vehicle moving

1.6 to 3.2 km/h (1 to 2 mph). Turn theknob to the Four-Wheel Drive High,AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive Highposition. You must wait for theFour-Wheel Drive High, AUTO,or Two-Wheel Drive High indicatorlight to stop flashing before shiftingthe transmission into gear.

{ Caution


It is typical for the vehicle to exhibitsignificant engagement noise andbump when shifting betweenFour-Wheel Drive Low andFour-Wheel Drive High ranges orfrom N (Neutral) with the enginerunning.

If the knob is turned to theFour-Wheel Drive High, AUTO,or Two-Wheel Drive High switchposition when the vehicle is in gearand/or moving more than5 km/h (3 mph), the Four-WheelDrive High, AUTO, or Two-WheelDrive High indicator light will flashfor 30 seconds but will not completethe shift. With the vehicle movingless than 5 km/h (3 mph), and thetransmission in N (Neutral), attemptthe shift again.

Shifting into N (Neutral)

To shift the transfer case toN (Neutral):

1. Make sure the vehicle is parkedso that it will not roll.

2. Set the parking brake and applythe regular brake pedal. SeeParking Brake on page 9-49.

3. Start the vehicle or turn theignition to ON/RUN.

4. Put the transmission inN (Neutral).



5. Shift the transfer case toTwo-Wheel Drive High.

6. Turn the transfer case dialclockwise to N (Neutral) until itstops and hold it there until theN (Neutral) light starts blinking.This will take at least10 seconds. Then slowly releasethe dial to the Four-Wheel DriveLow position. The N (Neutral)light will come on when thetransfer case shift to N (Neutral)is complete.

7. If the engine is running, makesure that the transfer case is inN (Neutral) by shifting thetransmission to R (Reverse) forone second, then shift thetransmission to D (Drive) forone second.

8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will turn theengine off.

9. Place the transmission shiftlever in P (Park).



Shifting Out of N (Neutral)

To shift out of N (Neutral):

1. Set the parking brake and applythe regular brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off, and shift thetransmission to N (Neutral).

3. Turn the transfer case dial toTwo-Wheel Drive High,Four-Wheel Drive High,or AUTO.

After the transfer case hasshifted out of N (Neutral), theN (Neutral) light will go out.


{ Caution


5. Start the engine and shift thetransmission to the desiredposition.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has ABS, an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the vehicle begins to driveaway, ABS checks itself.A momentary motor or clicking noisemight be heard while this test isgoing on, and it might even benoticed that the brake pedal movesa little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5-21.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpyou steer around the obstacle whilebraking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows you to steer and brakeat the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.



Parking Brake

Set the parking brake by holding theregular brake pedal down, thenpushing down the parking brakepedal.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5-20.

{ Caution

Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake systemand cause premature wear ordamage to brake system parts.Make sure that the parking brakeis fully released and the brakewarning light is off before driving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the parking brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the brakesystem warning light will flash and achime will sound warning you thatthe parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9-70.

Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This featureautomatically uses the stabilitysystem hydraulic brake controlmodule to supplement the powerbrake system under conditionswhere the driver has quickly andforcefully applied the brake pedal inan attempt to quickly stop or slowdown the vehicle. The stabilitysystem hydraulic brake controlmodule increases brake pressure ateach corner of the vehicle until theABS activates. Minor brake pedalpulsation or pedal movement duringthis time is normal and the drivershould continue to apply the brakepedal as the driving situationdictates. The brake assist featurewill automatically disengage whenthe brake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.



Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has an HSA feature,which may be useful when thevehicle is stopped on a grade. Thisfeature is designed to prevent thevehicle from rolling, either forward orrearward, during vehicle drive off.After you completely stop and holdthe vehicle in a complete standstillon a grade, HSA will automaticallyactivate. During the transition periodbetween when you release thebrake pedal and start to accelerateto drive off on a grade, HSA holdsthe braking pressure for a maximumof two seconds to ensure that thereis no rolling. The brakes willautomatically release when the

accelerator pedal is applied withinthe two-second window. If thevehicle is equipped with theIntegrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) system, HSA may also applythe trailer brakes. It will not activateif the vehicle is in a drive gear andfacing downhill or if the vehicle isfacing uphill and in R (Reverse).There may be situations on minorhills (less than 5% grade) with aloaded vehicle or while pulling atrailer where HSA will not activate.

If you release the brake pedal andthen reapply the brake pedal whileHSA is activated, the brake pedaltypically feels firmer with less pedaltravel.

Ride Control Systems

Traction Control/Electronic StabilityControl

System Operation

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, anelectronic stability control system.These systems help limit wheel spinand assist the driver in maintainingcontrol, especially on slippery roadconditions.

TCS activates if it senses that anyof the drive wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When thishappens, TCS applies the brakes tothe spinning wheels and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

StabiliTrak activates when thevehicle senses a difference betweenthe intended path and the directionthe vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak selectively appliesbraking pressure to any one of the



vehicle wheel brakes to assist thedriver in keeping the vehicle on theintended path. Trailer Sway Control(TSC) is also on automatically whenthe vehicle is started. See TrailerSway Control (TSC) on page 9-89.

If cruise control is being used andtraction control or StabiliTrak beginsto limit wheel spin, cruise control willdisengage. Cruise control may beturned back on when roadconditions allow.

Both systems come onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted and begins to move. Thesystems may be heard or felt whilethey are operating or whileperforming diagnostic checks. Thisis normal and does not mean thereis a problem with the vehicle.

It is recommended to leave bothsystems on for normal drivingconditions, but it may be necessaryto turn TCS off if the vehicle getsstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on

page 9-14 and “Turning theSystems Off and On” later in thissection.

When the transfer case is inFour-Wheel Drive Low, the stabilitysystem is automatically disabled,the StabiliTrak OFF light comes on,and the appropriate message willappear on the DIC. Both tractioncontrol and StabiliTrak areautomatically disabled in thiscondition.

The indicator light for both systemsis in the instrument cluster. Thislight will:. Flash when TCS is limiting

wheel spin.. Flash when StabiliTrak is

activated.

. Turn on and stay on when eithersystem is not working.

If either system fails to turn on or toactivate, a message displays in theDriver Information Center (DIC), andd comes on and stays on toindicate that the system is inactiveand is not assisting the driver inmaintaining control. The vehicle issafe to drive, but driving should beadjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

Drive the vehicle. If d comes onand stays on, the vehicle may needmore time to diagnose the problem.If the condition persists, see yourdealer.



Turning the Systems Offand On

The button for TCS and StabiliTrakis on the center stack.

{ Caution

Do not repeatedly brake oraccelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle driveline could bedamaged.

To turn off only TCS, press andrelease the g button. The traction

off light i displays in the instrumentcluster. The appropriate messagewill display in the DIC. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5-34. To turn TCS on again,

press and release the g button. The

traction off light i displayed in theinstrument cluster will turn off.

If TCS is limiting wheel spin whenthe g button is pressed, the systemwill not turn off until the wheels stopspinning.

To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,press and hold the g button until

the traction off light i and the

StabiliTrak OFF light g come onand stay on in the instrumentcluster, then release. Theappropriate message will display inthe DIC. See Ride Control SystemMessages on page 5-34.

To turn TCS and StabiliTrak onagain, press and release the gbutton. The traction off light i and

the StabiliTrak OFF light g in theinstrument cluster turn off.

StabiliTrak will automatically turn onif the vehicle exceeds 56 km/h(35 mph). Traction control willremain off.

The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature and a HillStart Assist (HSA) feature. SeeTrailer Sway Control (TSC) onpage 9-89 or Hill Start Assist (HSA)on page 9-50.

Adding accessories can affect thevehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-3.

Hill DescentControl (HDC)If equipped, HDC can be used whendriving downhill. It sets andmaintains vehicle speed whiledescending a very steep incline in aforward or reverse gear.

The HDC switch is on the centerstack, below the climate controls.



Press 5 to enable or disable HDC.Vehicle speed must be below50 km/h (31 mph).

The HDC light displays on theinstrument cluster when enabled.

HDC can maintain vehicle speedsbetween 3 and 22 km/h (2 and14 mph) on an incline greater thanor equal to a 10% grade. A blinkingHDC light indicates that the systemis actively applying the brakes tomaintain vehicle speed.

When HDC is set, that is the initialset speed. It can be increased ordecreased by applying theaccelerator or brake pedal. Thisadjusted speed becomes the newset speed.

HDC will remain enabled between22 and 60 km/h (14 and 37 mph),however vehicle speed cannot beset or maintained in this range.It will automatically disable if thevehicle speed is above 80 km/h(50 mph) or above 60 km/h(37 mph) for at least 30 seconds. 5must be pressed again tore-enable HDC.

When enabled, if the vehicle is at aspeed above 22 km/h (14 mph) andless than 60 km/h (37 mph), a DICmessage will display.

Locking Rear AxleVehicles with a locking rear axle cangive more traction on snow, mud,ice, sand, or gravel. It works like astandard axle most of the time, butwhen traction is low, this feature willallow the rear wheel with the mosttraction to move the vehicle.

Cruise Control

{ Warning

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. Do not use thecruise control on winding roads orin heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.

With cruise control a speed of about40 km/h (25 mph) or more can bemaintained without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow about 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol disengages.



If equipped with an Allison orHydra-Matic 6-speed automatictransmission, see “Tow/Haul ModeGrade Braking” under Tow/HaulMode on page 9-38 for anexplanation of how cruise controlinteracts with the Range SelectionMode, Tow/Haul Mode, and GradeBraking systems.

If the cruise control is being usedand the Traction Control (TCS)system or StabiliTrak begins to limitwheel spin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. SeeTraction Control/Electronic StabilityControl on page 9-50. If a collisionalert occurs when cruise control isactivated, cruise control isdisengaged. See Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) System on page 9-60.When road conditions allow thecruise control to be safely usedagain, it can be turned back on.

5 (On/Off): Press to turn thesystem on or off. The indicator lightis white when cruise control is onand turns off when cruise controlis off.

+RES (Resume/Accelerate):Press briefly to make the vehicleresume to a previously set speed,or press and hold to accelerate.If cruise control is already active,use to increase vehicle speed.

SET− (Set/Coast): Press briefly toset the speed and activate cruisecontrol. If cruise control is alreadyactive, use to decrease vehiclespeed.

* (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get pressed and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control button off when cruiseis not being used.

The cruise control light on theinstrument cluster will come ongreen after the cruise control hasbeen set to the desired speed.

1. Press5 to turn the cruisesystem on.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Press and release the SET−button on the steering wheel.

4. Remove foot from theaccelerator.



Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle speed reachesabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or more,press the +RES button briefly on thesteering wheel. The vehicle returnsto the previous set speed.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press and hold the +RES button

on the steering wheel until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase vehicle speed insmall increments, briefly pressthe +RES button. Each time thisis done, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Press and hold the SET– button

on the steering wheel until thedesired lower speed is reached,then release it.

. To slow down in smallincrements, briefly press theSET– button. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed. Whilepressing the accelerator pedal orshortly following the release tooverride cruise control, brieflypressing the SET– button will resultin cruise control set to the currentvehicle speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends on the vehiclespeed, the load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, pressing the accelerator pedalmay be necessary to maintainvehicle speed.

While going downhill:. Vehicles with a 6-speed

automatic transmission and agasoline engine have CruiseGrade Braking to help maintaindriver selected speed.

Cruise Grade Braking is enabledwhen the vehicle is started andcruise control is active. It is notenabled in Range SelectionMode. It assists in maintainingdriver selected speed whendriving on downhill grades byusing the engine andtransmission to slow the vehicle.



To disable and enable CruiseGrade Braking for the currentignition key cycle, press andhold the Tow/Haul button forfive seconds. A DIC messagedisplays. See TransmissionMessages on page 5-36.

. Vehicles with a diesel enginehave Cruise Grade Brakingenabled when Tow/Haul Mode ison, the exhaust brake is on,or both are on.

For other forms of Grade Braking,see Automatic Transmission onpage 9-33.Tow/Haul Mode onpage 9-38, and Hill Descent Control(HDC) on page 9-52.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal.. To disengage cruise control,

Press* on the steering wheel.

. To turn off the cruise control,press5 on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory by pressing 5or if the ignition is turned off.

Driver AssistanceSystemsThis vehicle may have features thatwork together to help avoid crashesor reduce crash damage whiledriving, backing, and parking. Readthis entire section before usingthese systems.

{ Warning

Do not rely on the DriverAssistance Systems. Thesesystems do not replace the needfor paying attention and drivingsafely. You may not hear or feelalerts or warnings provided bythese systems. Failure to useproper care when driving mayresult in injury, death, or vehicledamage. See Defensive Drivingon page 9-3.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

Under many conditions, thesesystems will not:

. Detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, or animals.

. Detect vehicles or objectsoutside the area monitored bythe system.

. Work at all driving speeds.

. Warn you or provide you withenough time to avoid a crash.

. Work under poor visibility orbad weather conditions.

. Work if the detection sensoris not cleaned or is coveredby ice, snow, mud, or dirt.

Complete attention is alwaysrequired while driving, and youshould be ready to take actionand apply the brakes and/or steerthe vehicle to avoid crashes.

Audible or Safety Alert Seat

Some driver assistance featuresalert the driver of obstacles bybeeping. To change the volume ofthe warning chime, see “Comfortand Convenience” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-39.

If equipped with the Safety AlertSeat, the driver seat cushion mayprovide a vibrating pulse alertinstead of beeping. To change this,see “Collision/Detection Systems”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5-39.

Assistance Systems forParking or BackingWhen the vehicle is in R (Reverse),the Rear Vision Camera (RVC) andRear Parking Assist may help thedriver to avoid a crash or to reducecrash damage. Some models mayalso have Front Parking Assist.

The RVC and Rear Parking Assistwill not work properly if the tailgateis down. If the tailgate is down, donot use these systems.

When the vehicle is shifted intoR (Reverse), the RVC displays animage of the area behind the vehiclein the center stack display. Theprevious screen displays when thevehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse)after a short delay. To return to theprevious screen sooner, press abutton on the infotainment system,shift into P (Park), or reach a vehiclespeed of 8 km/h (5 mph).

{ Warning

The RVC system does not displaychildren, pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or any other objectlocated outside the camera's fieldof view, below the bumper,or under the vehicle. Perceiveddistances may be different fromactual distances. Do not back the

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

vehicle using only the RVCscreen, during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers,or where there could be crosstraffic. Failure to use proper carebefore backing may result ininjury, death, or vehicle damage.Always check behind and aroundthe vehicle before backing.

1. View Displayed by the Camera

1. View Displayed by the Camera

2. Corners of the Rear Bumper

Displayed images may be farther orcloser than they appear. The areadisplayed is limited and objects thatare close to either corner of thebumper or under the bumper do notdisplay.

A warning triangle may display onthe RVC screen to show where theUltrasonic Rear Parking Assist(URPA) has detected an object. Thistriangle changes from amber to redand increases in size the closer theobject.

With Rear Park Assist, and ifequipped with Front Park Assist, asthe vehicle moves at speeds of less

than 8 km/h (5 mph) the sensors onthe bumpers detect objects up to2.5 m (8 ft) behind and 1.2 m (4 ft) infront of the vehicle within a zone25 cm (10 in) high off the groundand below bumper level. Thesedetection distances may be lessduring warmer or humid weather.

{ Warning

The parking assist system doesnot detect children, pedestrians,bicyclists, animals, or objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. It is not available atspeeds greater than 8 km/h(5 mph). To prevent injury, death,or vehicle damage, even withparking assist, always check thearea around the vehicle andcheck all mirrors before movingforward or backing.



The vehicle may have an instrumentcluster parking assist display withbars that show “distance to object”and object location information forURPA, and on some vehicles, forthe Front Parking Assist system. Asthe object gets closer, more barslight up.

When an object is first detected inthe rear, one beep will be heardfrom the rear, or both sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse twotimes. When an object is very close(<0.6 m (2 ft) in the vehicle rear,or <0.3 m (1 ft) in the vehicle front),a continuous beep will sound from

the front or rear, or both sides of theSafety Alert Seat will pulse fivetimes. Beeps for Front ParkingAssist are higher pitched than forRear Parking Assist.

Turning the Features On or Off

TheX button on the center stackis used to turn on or off the Frontand Rear Parking Assist. Theindicator light in the button comeson when the features are on andturns off when the features havebeen disabled.

Front and Rear Parking Assist canbe turned off, on, or on with towbarthrough vehicle personalization. See“Parking Assist” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5-39. If theparking assist is turned off throughvehicle personalization, the park

assist button on the center stack willbe disabled. To turn the parkingassist on again, select On in thevehicle personalization menu. TheOn with Towbar setting allows forthe parking assist to work properlywith a small item attached to thetrailer hitch. Turn off parking assistwhen towing a trailer.

To turn the Rear Vision Camera(RVC) system rear parking assistsymbols or guidance lines on or off:

1. On the infotainment systemHome screen, press the Settingsscreen button, or turn the MENUknob to highlight Settings andpress MENU.

2. Select Rear Camera.

3. Press Rear Park Assist Symbolsor Guidance Lines and thenselect Off or On.

Disconnecting the Rear VisionCamera (RVC)

The RVC must be disconnected ifthe tailgate needs to be removed.



The RVC is disconnected byremoving the connector from theelectrical junction block mounted onthe left side of the cross member ofthe vehicle frame. Afterdisconnecting, the cap mountednext to the camera connector mustbe relocated so that the openterminals on the junction block arecovered.

Assistance Systems forDrivingIf equipped, when driving thevehicle, Forward Collision Alert(FCA) and Lane Departure Warning(LDW) can help to avoid a crash orreduce crash damage.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemIf equipped, the FCA system mayhelp to avoid or reduce the harmcaused by front-end crashes. Whenapproaching a vehicle ahead tooquickly, FCA provides a red flashingalert on the windshield and rapidly

beeps or pulses the driver seat.FCA also lights an amber visualalert if following another vehiclemuch too closely.

FCA detects vehicles within adistance of approximately 60 m(197 ft) and operates at speedsabove 40 km/h (25 mph).

{ Warning

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provide awarning with enough time to helpavoid a crash. FCA does not warnof pedestrians, animals, signs,guardrails, bridges, constructionbarrels, or other objects. Be readyto take action and apply thebrakes. For more information, seeDefensive Driving on page 9-3.

FCA can be disabled with the FCAsteering wheel control.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

FCA warnings will not occur unlessthe FCA system detects a vehicleahead. When a vehicle is detectedahead, the vehicle ahead indicatorwill display green. Vehicles may notbe detected on curves, highway exitramps, or hills; or due to poorvisibility. FCA will not detect anothervehicle ahead until it is completelyin the driving lane.



{ Warning

FCA does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects a vehicle. FCA may notdetect a vehicle ahead if the FCAsensor is blocked by dirt, snow,or ice, or if the windshield isdamaged. It may also not detect avehicle on winding or hilly roads,or in conditions that can limitvisibility such as fog, rain,or snow, or if the headlamps orwindshield are not cleaned or inproper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, and FCAsensors clean and in good repair.

Collision Alert

When your vehicle approachesanother detected vehicle too rapidly,six red lights will flash on thewindshield. Also, eight rapidhigh-pitched beeps will sound fromthe front, or both sides of the SafetyAlert Seat will pulse five times.

When this Collision Alert occurs, thebrake system may prepare for driverbraking to occur more rapidly whichcan cause a brief, mild deceleration.Continue to apply the brake pedalas needed. Cruise control may bedisengaged when the Collision Alertoccurs.

Tailgating Alert

The vehicle ahead indicator willdisplay amber when you arefollowing a vehicle ahead much tooclosely.



Selecting the Alert Timing

The FCA control I son the steeringwheel. Press[ to set the FCAtiming to Far, Medium, Near, or Off.The first button press shows thecurrent setting on the DIC.Additional button presses willchange this setting. The chosensetting will remain until it is changedand will affect the timing of both theCollision Alert and the TailgatingAlert features. The timing of bothalerts will vary based on vehiclespeed. The faster the vehicle speed,the farther away the alert will occur.

Consider traffic and weatherconditions when selecting the alerttiming. The range of selectable alerttiming may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions.

Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may provide unnecessaryalerts for turning vehicles, vehiclesin other lanes, objects that are notvehicles, or shadows. These alertsare normal operation and thevehicle does not need service.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, cleaning theoutside of the windshield in front ofthe camera sensor may correct theissue.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)If equipped, LDW may help avoidcrashes due to unintentional lanedepartures. It may provide awarning if the vehicle is crossing a

detected lane marking without usinga turn signal in the lane departuredirection. LDW uses a camerasensor to detect the lane markings.It only operates at speeds of56 km/h (35 mph) or greater.

When the vehicle crosses adetected lane marking, the LDWindicator will flash and either threebeeps will be sounded from the leftor right side, or three Safety AlertSeat pulses will occur on the left orright side of the seat, depending onthe lane departure direction. LDWwill not warn if the turn signal is onin the departure direction, or if asharp maneuver is made.

{ Warning

The LDW system is an aid to helpthe vehicle stay in the drivinglane. It does not steer the vehicle.The LDW system may not:

. Provide enough time to avoida crash.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Detect lane markings underbad weather conditions or ifthe windshield is dirty.

. Detect lane markings and willnot detect road edges.

. Warn that the vehicle iscrossing a lane marking if thesystem does not detect thelane marking.

If LDW only detects lanemarkings on one side of the road,it will only warn you whendeparting the lane on the sidewhere it has detected a lanemarker. Even with LDW, alwayskeep your attention on the roadand maintain proper vehicleposition within the lane, or vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Always keep thewindshield clean and do not useLDW in bad weather conditions.

How the System Works

The LDW camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LDW on and off, press @ onthe center stack. The controlindicator will light when LDW is on.

When the vehicle is started, theLDW indicator on the instrumentcluster will come on briefly.

If LDW is on, the LDW indicator willappear green if the system detectsa left or right lane marking while thevehicle is traveling at 56 km/h(35 mph) or greater. If the vehiclecrosses a detected lane markingwithout using the turn signal in thelane departure direction, thisindicator will change to amber andflash. In addition, three beeps will

be sounded from the left or rightside, or the Safety Alert Seat willpulse three times on either the leftor right side of the seat, dependingon the lane departure direction.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

If the LDW symbol does not appearwhen the system is on and thevehicle is traveling at least 56 km/h(35 mph):. The lane markings on the road

may not be seen.. The camera sensor may be

blocked by dirt, snow, or ice.. The windshield may be

damaged.. The weather may be limiting

visibility.

This is normal operation; the vehicledoes not need service. Clean thewindshield.

Lane markings may not be detectedon curves, highway exit ramps,or hills; or due to poor visibility.



If the LDW camera system does notseem to operate properly, cleaningthe outside of the windshield in frontof the camera sensor may correctthe issue.

{ Warning

LDW does not provide a warningto help avoid a crash, unless itdetects the lane markings. LDWmay not detect the lane markingsif the camera sensor is blockedby dirt, snow, or ice, or if thewindshield is damaged. It mayalso not detect a lane on windingor hilly roads, or in conditions thatcan limit visibility such as fog,rain, or snow, or if the headlampsor windshield are not cleaned orin proper condition. Keep thewindshield, headlamps, andcamera sensors clean and ingood repair.

LDW warnings may occur due to tarmarks, shadows, cracks in the road,or other road imperfections. This isnormal system operation; thevehicle does not need service.

FuelFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Fuel for Diesel Engines” in theDuramax diesel supplement.

For gasoline engine vehicles, use ofthe recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. Whendriving in the U.S., to help keep theengine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, werecommend using TOP TIERDetergent Gasolines.

See www.toptiergas.com for a list ofTOP TIER Detergent Gasolines.



If the vehicle has a yellow fuel cap,E85 or FlexFuel can be used in thevehicle. See E85 or FlexFuel onpage 9-66.

For all vehicles except those withthe 6.2L V8 engine, use regularunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If theoctane rating is less than 87, anaudible knocking noise may beheard. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soonas possible. If heavy knocking isheard when using a higher octanerated gasoline, the engine needsservice.

If the vehicle has the 6.2L V8 engine(VIN Code J), use premiumunleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 91 or higher.Regular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or higher can be used,but acceleration could be reduced,and an audible knocking noise maybe heard. If the octane is less than87, a heavy knocking noise may beheard. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soonas possible. Otherwise, the enginecould be damaged. If heavyknocking is heard when usinggasoline with a higher octane rating,the engine needs service.

Use of Seasonal Fuels

Use summer and winter fuels in theappropriate season. Driving orstarting could be affected if theincorrect fuel is used. Drive thevehicle with the engine running untilthe fuel is a half tank or less, thenrefuel with the current seasonal fuel.

Prohibited Fuels

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, as wellas reformulated gasolines areavailable in some cities. If thesegasolines comply with thepreviousely described specification,then they are acceptable to use.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must be used only inflex fuel vehicles.

{ Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Some gasolines that are notreformulated for low emissions cancontain an octane-enhancingadditive called



methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). Do not usegasolines with MMT as they canreduce spark plug life and affectemission control systemperformance. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, see your dealer for service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meetASTM specification D 4814. Somegasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See “ProhibitedFuels" in Fuel on page 9-64.

California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission control

label. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle may not pass a smog-checktest. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5-17. If this occurs,return to your authorized dealer fordiagnosis. If it is determined that thecondition is caused by the type offuel used, repairs may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesIf planning to drive in countriesoutside the U.S. or Canada, theproper fuel might be hard to find.Check regional auto club or fuelretail brand websites for availabilityin the country where driving. Neveruse leaded gasoline, fuel containingmethanol, or any other fuel notrecommended. Costly repairs

caused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

Fuel AdditivesTo keep fuel systems clean, TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline isrecommended. See Fuel onpage 9-64.

If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline isnot available, one bottle of FuelSystem Treatment PLUS, partnumber 88861013, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp. Fuel System Treatment PLUSis the only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.It is available at your dealer.

Do not use additives with E85 orFlexFuel.

E85 or FlexFuelVehicles with a yellow fuel cap canuse either unleaded gasoline or fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).



All other vehicles should use onlythe unleaded gasoline as describedin Fuel on page 9-64.

The use of E85 or FlexFuel isencouraged when the vehicle isdesigned to use it. E85 or FlexFuelis made from renewable sources.

To help locate fuel stations thatcarry E85 or FlexFuel, the U.S.Department of Energy has analternative fuels website. Seewww.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations.

E85 or FlexFuel should meet ASTMSpecification D 5798 or CAN/CGSB–3.512 in Canada. Do not usethe fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%. Fuel mixtures thatdo not meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on.

For the 6.0L V8 engine, afterrefueling, the vehicle calculates thecomposition of the fuel. It is notrecommended to repeatedly switchbetween fuels. If fuels are switched

frequently, add as much fuel aspossible and do not add less than11 L (3 gal) when refueling. Drive atleast 11 km (7 mi) immediately afterrefueling to allow the vehicle toadapt to the change in ethanolconcentration.

Because E85 or FlexFuel has lessenergy per liter (gallon) thangasoline, the vehicle will need to berefilled more often. See Filling theTank on page 9-67.

{ Caution

Some additives are notcompatible with E85 or FlexFueland can harm the vehicle's fuelsystem. Do not add anything toE85 or FlexFuel. Damage causedby additives would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Do not use fuel containingmethanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and alsodamage plastic and rubber parts.That damage would not becovered under the vehiclewarranty.

Filling the TankIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax diesel supplementfor more information.

{ Warning

Fuel vapors and fuel fires burnviolently and can cause injury ordeath.

. To help avoid injuries to youand others, read and followall the instructions on the fuelpump island.

(Continued)



Warning (Continued)

. Turn off the engine whenrefueling.

. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials awayfrom fuel.

. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended.

. Do not reenter the vehiclewhile pumping fuel.

. Keep children away from thefuel pump and never letchildren pump fuel.

. Fuel can spray out if the fuelcap is opened too quickly.This spray can happen if thetank is nearly full, and ismore likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stopthen unscrew the cap allthe way

The fuel cap is behind a hinged fueldoor on the driver side of thevehicle. Vehicles that have aFlexFuel badge and a yellow fuelcap can use either unleadedgasoline or ethanol fuel containingup to 85% ethanol (E85). See E85or FlexFuel on page 9-66.

To remove the fuel cap, turn itslowly counterclockwise.

If the vehicle is a dual fuel tankchassis cab model, and it runs outof fuel, refuel the front fuel tank firstto ensure a quick restart.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do nottop off or overfill the tank and wait afew seconds after you have finishedpumping before removing thenozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10-90.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn itclockwise until it clicks. It will requiremore effort to turn the fuel cap onthe last turn as you tighten it. Makesure the cap is fully installed. Thediagnostic system can determine ifthe fuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. This wouldallow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5-17.

The TIGHTEN GAS CAP messagedisplays on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) if the fuel cap is notproperly installed. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5-32 for moreinformation.



{ Warning

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

{ Caution

If a new fuel cap is needed, besure to get the right type of capfrom your dealer. The wrong typeof fuel cap might not fit properly,might cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to light, and coulddamage the fuel tank andemissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5-17.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ Warning

Filling a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle can causefuel vapors that can ignite eitherby static electricity or othermeans. You or others could bebadly burned and the vehiclecould be damaged. Always:

. Use approved fuelcontainers.

. Remove the container fromthe vehicle, trunk, or pickupbed before filling.

. Place the container on theground.

. Place the nozzle inside the fillopening of the containerbefore dispensing fuel, and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

keep it in contact with the fillopening until filling iscomplete.

. Fill the container no morethan 95% full to allow forexpansion.

. Do not smoke, light matches,or use lighters whilepumping fuel.

. Avoid using cell phones orother electronic devices.



Trailer Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer. Readthe entire section before towing atrailer.

For towing a disabled vehicle, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10-87.For towing the vehicle behindanother vehicle such as a motorhome, see Recreational VehicleTowing on page 10-88.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

Driving with a Trailer

When towing a trailer:. Become familiar with the state

and local laws that apply totrailer towing.

. Do not tow a trailer during thefirst 800 km (500 mi) to preventdamage to the engine, axle,or other parts.

. Then during the first 800 km(500 mi) of trailer towing, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.

. Vehicles can tow in D (Drive).Shift the transmission to a lowergear if the transmission shiftstoo often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

. Turn off Park Assist whentowing.

{ Warning

When towing a trailer, exhaustgases may collect at the rear ofthe vehicle and enter if theliftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow is open.

When towing a trailer:

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Do not drive with the liftgate,trunk/hatch, or rear-mostwindow open.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Also adjust the climatecontrol system to a settingthat brings in only outside air.See “Climate ControlSystems” in the Index.

For more information aboutCarbon Monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9-32.

Towing a trailer requires a certainamount of experience. Thecombination you are driving islonger and not as responsive as thevehicle itself. Get acquainted withthe handling and braking of the rigbefore setting out for the open road.



Before starting, check all trailer hitchparts and attachments, safetychains, electrical connectors, lamps,tires, and mirrors. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start thecombination moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes work.

During the trip, check occasionallyto be sure that the load is secureand the lamps and any trailerbrakes still work.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid heavybraking and sudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Thecombination will not accelerate asquickly and is longer so it isnecessary to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle beforereturning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

{ Caution

Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer tocome in contact with the vehicle.The vehicle could be damaged.Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,or other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

If the trailer turn signal bulbs burnout, the arrows on the instrumentcluster will still flash for turns. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might get hot and no longerwork well.

Vehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shiftthe transmission to a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too oftenunder heavy loads and/or hillyconditions.

The Tow/Haul Mode may be used ifthe transmission shifts too often.See Tow/Haul Mode on page 9-38.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned off



immediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with thetransmission in P (Park) for a fewminutes before turning the engineoff. If the overheat warning comeson, see Engine Overheating onpage 10-21.

Parking on Hills

{ Warning

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the regular brakesuntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Shift into a gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance when TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3. Things that areespecially important in traileroperation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system, andbrake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.



Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Trailer TowingIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

If the vehicle is bi-fuel, see thebi-fuel supplement.

Do not tow a trailer during break-in.See New Vehicle Break-In onpage 9-23 for more information.

{ Warning

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell or even at all. The driver andpassengers could be seriouslyinjured. The vehicle may also bedamaged; the resulting repairs

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

{ Caution

Pulling a trailer improperly candamage the vehicle and result incostly repairs not covered by thevehicle warranty. To pull a trailercorrectly, follow the advice in thissection and see your dealer forimportant information abouttowing a trailer with the vehicle.

To identify the trailering capacity ofthe vehicle, read the information in“Weight of the Trailer” later in thissection.

Trailering is different than justdriving the vehicle by itself.Trailering means changes inhandling, acceleration, braking,durability, and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takescorrect equipment, and it has to beused properly.

The following information has manytime-tested, important trailering tipsand safety rules. Many of these areimportant for your safety and that ofyour passengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It depends on how the rig is used.Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, and how muchthe vehicle is used to pull a trailerare all important. It can depend onany special equipment on thevehicle, and the amount of tongueweight the vehicle can carry. See“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” laterin this section for more information.



Trailer weight rating (TWR) iscalculated assuming the tow vehiclehas only the driver but all requiredtrailering equipment. Weight ofadditional optional equipment,passengers, and cargo in the towvehicle must be subtracted from thetrailer weight rating.

For kingpin weight and trailertongue weight information, see“Weight of the Trailer Tongue” laterin this section.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle model andoptions.

Weights listed apply forconventional trailers and fifth-wheeltrailers unless otherwise noted.



Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR (a)

1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Standard Box

5.3LV8 3.42 4 400 kg (9700 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)

6.2LV8 3.42 4 355 kg (9,600 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)

1500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Short Box (b)

5.3LV8 3.42 4 445 kg (9800 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)

6.2LV8 3.42 4 400 kg (9,700 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)


5.3LV8 3.42 4 309 kg (9,500 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)

6.2LV8 3.42 4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)

1500 Series 4WD Crew Cab Short Box (b)

5.3LV8 3.42 4 355 kg (9,600 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)

6.2LV8 3.42 4 309 kg (9,500 lb) 6 804 kg (15,000 lb)


6.0LV8 3.73 4 400 kg (9,700 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)

6.0LV8 – Conventional Trailer 4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)

6.0LV8 – Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 441 kg (14,200 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)




2500 Series 2WD Crew Cab Long Box

6.0LV8 3.73 4 354 kg (9,600 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)




6.0LV8 3.73 4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)




6.0LV8 3.73 4 218 kg (9,300 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)




6.0LV8 3.73 4 309 kg (9,500 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)


6.0LV8 Fifth-Wheel Trailer 4.10 6 350 kg (14,000 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)





6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 264 kg (9,400 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)

6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels)Conventional Trailer

4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)

6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels)Fifth-Wheel Trailer

4.10 6 305 kg (13,900 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)

6.0LV8 (Dual Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 082 kg (9,000 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)



6.0LV8 3.73 4 173 kg (9,200 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)




6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels) 3.73 4 128 kg (9,100 lb) 7 257 kg (16,000 lb)

6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels)Conventional Trailer

4.10 5 897 kg (13,000 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)

6.0LV8 (Single Rear Wheels)Fifth-Wheel Trailer

4.10 6 169 kg (13,600 lb) 9 299 kg (20,500 lb)






(a) The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicleand trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment, and conversions. The GCWR for the vehicle should not beexceeded.(b) This model is neither designed nor intended to tow fifth-wheel or gooseneck trailers.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (1) of any trailer isvery important because it is alsopart of the vehicle weight. TheGross Vehicle Weight (GVW)includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo carried in it, andthe people who will be riding in thevehicle as well as trailer tongueweight. Vehicle options, equipment,passengers and cargo in the vehiclereduce the amount of tongue weightthe vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight the vehicle

can tow. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15 for more informationabout the vehicle's maximum loadcapacity.

Trailer tongue weight (1) should be10–15% and fifth-wheel orgooseneck kingpin weight should be15–25% of the loaded trailer weightup to the maximums for vehicleseries and hitch type.



Vehicle Series Hitch TypeMaximum Tongue

Weight

1500 Weight-Carrying 363 kg (800 lb)

1500 Weight-Distributing 544 kg (1,200 lb)

2500/3500Standard Box

Weight-Carrying orWeight-Distributing

680 kg (1,500 lb)

2500/3500 Long Box

Weight-Carrying orWeight-Distributing

907 kg (2,000 lb)

2500 Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 361 kg (3,000 lb)

3500 Single RearWheels

Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 1 814 kg (4,000 lb)

3500 Dual RearWheels

Fifth-Wheel Gooseneck 2 495 kg (5,500 lb)

Do not exceed the maximumallowable tongue weight for thevehicle. Choose the shortest hitchextension that will position the hitchball closest to the vehicle. This willhelp reduce the effect of trailertongue weight on the rear axle.

Trailer rating may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue or kingpin weightcannot cause the vehicle to exceedthe GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) or the RGAWR (Rear GrossAxle Weight Rating). See “TotalWeight on the Vehicle's Tires” laterin this section.

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

If a cargo carrier is used in thetrailer hitch receiver, choose acarrier that positions the load asclose to the vehicle as possible.Make sure the total weight,including the carrier, is no more thanhalf of the maximum allowabletongue weight for the vehicle or227 kg (500 lb), whichever is less.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the inflation pressuresfound on the Certification/Tire labelon the center pillar or see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-15. Makesure not to exceed the GVWR limitfor the vehicle, or the RGAWR, withthe tow vehicle and trailer fullyloaded for the trip including theweight of the trailer tongue. If using



a weight-distributing hitch, makesure not to exceed the RGAWRbefore applying the weightdistribution spring bars.

Weight of the TraileringCombination

It is important that the combinationof the tow vehicle and trailer doesnot exceed any of its weight ratings— GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR, TrailerWeight Rating, or Tongue Weight.The only way to be sure it is notexceeding any of these ratings is toweigh the tow vehicle and trailercombination, fully loaded for the trip,getting individual weights for each ofthese items.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

The correct hitch equipment helpsmaintain combination control. Manytrailers can be towed with aweight-carrying hitch which simplyfeatures a coupler latched to thehitch ball, or a tow eye latched to a

pintle hook. Other trailers mayrequire a weight-distributing hitchthat uses spring bars to distributethe trailer tongue weight among thetwo vehicle and trailer axles.Fifth-wheel and gooseneck hitchesmay also be used. See “Weight ofthe Trailer Tongue” under TrailerTowing on page 9-73 for rating limitswith various hitch types.

If a step-bumper hitch will be used,the bumper could be damaged insharp turns. Make sure thereis ample room when turning to avoidcontact between the trailer and thebumper.

Consider using sway controls withany trailer. Ask a traileringprofessional about sway controls orrefer to the trailer manufacturer'srecommendations and instructions.

Weight-Distributing Hitch andAdjustment

A weight distributing hitch may beuseful with some trailers. Use thefollowing guidelines to determine if aweight distributing hitch shouldbe used.



Vehicle Series Trailer WeightWeight Distributing Hitch

Usage Hitch Distribution

1500 Up to 7,000 lb Optional Refer to trailermanufacturer’srecommendation

1500 Over 7,000 lb Required 50%

2500/3500 Up to 18,000 lb Optional Refer to trailermanufacturer’srecommendation

1. Body to Ground Distance

2. Front of Vehicle

When using a weight-distributinghitch, measure distance (1) beforecoupling the trailer to the hitch ball.Measure the height again after thetrailer is coupled and adjust thespring bars so the distance (1) is asclose as possible to halfwaybetween the two measurements.

Fifth-Wheel and GooseneckTrailering

Fifth-wheel and gooseneck trailerscan be used with many pickupmodels. These trailers place alarger percentage of the weight

(kingpin weight) on the tow vehiclethan conventional trailers. Makesure this weight does not cause thevehicle to exceed GAWR or GVWR.

Fifth-wheel or gooseneck kingpinweight should be 15 to 25 percent ofthe trailer weight up to the maximumamount specified in the traileringchart for the vehicle. See “Weight ofthe Trailer” under Trailer Towing onpage 9-73.

The hitch should be located in thepickup bed so that its centerline isover or slightly in front of the rearaxle. Take care that it is not so far



forward that it will contact the backof the cab in sharp turns. This isespecially important for short boxpickups. Trailer pin box extensionsand sliding fifth-wheel hitchassemblies can help this condition.There should be at least 15 cm (6 in)of clearance between the top of thepickup box and the bottom of thetrailer shelf that extends overthe box.

Make sure the hitch is attached tothe tow vehicle frame rails. Do notuse the pickup box for support.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitchmanufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. If the trailer beingtowed weighs up to 2 271 kg(5,000 lb) with a factory-installed

step bumper, safety chains may beattached to the attaching points onthe bumper; otherwise, safetychains should be attached to holeson the trailer hitch platform. Alwaysleave just enough slack so thecombination can turn. Never allowsafety chains to drag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

A loaded trailer that weighs morethan 900 kg (2,000 lb) needs to haveits own brake system that isadequate for the weight of thetrailer. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Do not tap into the vehicle'shydraulic brake system.

Auxiliary Battery

The auxiliary battery provision canbe used to supply electrical powerto additional equipment that may beadded, such as a slide-in camper.

If equipped, this relay will be on thedriver side of the vehicle, next to theunderhood electrical center.

Be sure to follow the properinstallation instructions included withany electrical equipment that isinstalled.

{ Caution

Leaving electrical equipment onfor extended periods will drain thebattery. Always turn off electricalequipment when not in use anddo not use equipment thatexceeds the maximum amperagerating of 30 amps for the auxiliarybattery provision.

Trailer Wiring Harness

The vehicle is equipped with one ofthe following wiring harnesses fortowing a trailer or hauling a slide-incamper.



Basic Trailer Wiring

All regular, double cab, and crewcab pickups have a seven-wiretrailer towing harness.

For vehicles not equipped withheavy duty trailering, the harness issecured to the vehicle's framebehind the spare tire mount. Theharness requires the installation of atrailer connector, which is availablethrough your dealer.

Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring HarnessPackage

For vehicles equipped withheavy-duty trailering, the harnessconnector is mounted in the bumper.The seven-wire harness containsthe following trailer circuits:. Green/Violet: Left Stop/Turn

Signal. Yellow/Gray: Right Stop/Turn

Signal. Gray/Brown: Taillamps/

Parklamps. White: Ground. White/Green: Back-up Lamps. Red/Green: Battery Feed. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake

If charging a remote (non-vehicle)battery, press the Tow/Haul Modebutton, if equipped, located at theend of the shift lever. This will boostthe vehicle system voltage andproperly charge the battery. If thetrailer is too light for Tow/HaulMode, or the vehicle is not equippedwith Tow/Haul, turn on the

headlamps as a second way toboost the vehicle system andcharge the battery.

Camper/Fifth-Wheel Trailer WiringPackage

The seven-wire camper harness isunder the rear bumper, attached tothe frame near the rearcrossmember. A connector must beadded to the wiring harness thatconnects to the camper.

The harness contains the followingcamper/trailer circuits:. Green/Violet: Left Stop/Turn

Signal. Yellow/Gray: Right Stop/Turn

Signal. Gray/Brown: Taillamps/

Parklamps. White: Ground. White/Green: Back-up Lamps. Red/Green: Battery Feed. Dark Blue: Trailer Brake



If the vehicle is equipped with theheavy-duty trailering option, see“Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring HarnessPackage” earlier in this section.

When the camper-wiring harness isordered without the heavy-dutytrailering package, a seven-wireharness with a seven-pin connectoris at the rear of the vehicle and istied to the vehicle's frame.

Electric Brake Control WiringProvisions

These wiring provisions areincluded with the vehicle as part ofthe trailer wiring package. Theseprovisions are for an electric brakecontroller.

The harness should be installed byyour dealer or a qualified servicecenter.

Tow/Haul Mode

Pressing this button at the end ofthe shift lever turns on and off theTow/Haul Mode.

This indicator light on the instrumentcluster comes on when the Tow/Haul Mode is on.

Tow/Haul is a feature that assistswhen pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load. See Tow/HaulMode on page 9-38.

Tow/Haul is designed to be mosteffective when the vehicle andtrailer combined weight is at least75 percent of the vehicle's GrossCombined Weight Rating (GCWR).See “Weight of the Trailer” underTrailer Towing on page 9-73. Tow/Haul is most useful under thefollowing driving conditions:. When pulling a heavy trailer or a

large or heavy load throughrolling terrain.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load instop-and-go traffic.

. When pulling a heavy trailer or alarge or heavy load in busyparking lots where improved lowspeed control of the vehicle isdesired.



Operating the vehicle in Tow/Haulwhen lightly loaded or with no trailerat all will not cause damage.However, there is no benefit to theselection of Tow/Haul when thevehicle is unloaded. Such aselection when unloaded may resultin unpleasant engine andtransmission driving characteristicsand reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul is recommended only whenpulling a heavy trailer or a large orheavy load.

Integrated Trailer BrakeControl System

The vehicle may have an IntegratedTrailer Brake Control (ITBC) systemfor use with electric trailer brakes ormost electric-over-hydraulic trailerbrakes.

This symbol is on the Trailer BrakeControl Panel on vehicles with anIntegrated Trailer Brake Controlsystem. The power output to thetrailer brakes is based on theamount of brake pressure beingapplied by the vehicle’s brakesystem, and on the type of trailerbrakes detected. This availablepower output to the trailer brakescan be adjusted to a wide range oftrailering situations.

The ITBC system is integrated withthe vehicle’s brake, antilock brake,and StabiliTrak systems. In traileringconditions that cause the vehicle’santilock brake or StabiliTraksystems to activate, power sent tothe trailer's brakes will beautomatically adjusted to minimizetrailer wheel lock-up. This does notimply that the trailer has StabiliTrak.

If the vehicle’s brake, antilock brake,or StabiliTrak systems are notfunctioning properly, the ITBCsystem may not be fully functionalor may not function at all. Make sure

all of these systems are fullyoperational to ensure fullfunctionality of the ITBC system.

The ITBC system is poweredthrough the vehicle's electricalsystem. Turning the ignition off willalso turn off the ITBC system. TheITBC system is fully functional onlywhen the ignition is in ON/RUN.

{ Warning

Connecting a trailer that has anair brake system may result inreduced or complete loss of trailerbraking. There may be anincrease in stopping distance ortrailer instability which couldresult in personal injury ordamage to the vehicle, trailer,or other property. Use the ITBCsystem only with electric orelectric over hydraulic trailerbrakes.



Trailer Brake Control Panel

1. Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever

2. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons

The ITBC system has a controlpanel on the instrument panel to theleft of the steering column. SeeInstrument Panel on page 1-2. Thecontrol panel allows adjustment tothe amount of output, referred to asTrailer Gain, available to the trailerbrakes and allows manualapplication of the trailer brakes. TheTrailer Brake Control Panel is used

along with the Trailer Brake DisplayPage on the DIC to adjust anddisplay power output to the trailerbrakes.

Trailer Brake DIC Display Page

The ITBC system displaysmessages in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

The display page indicates TrailerGain setting, power output to thetrailer brakes, trailer connection, andsystem operational status.

To display the Trailer Brake DisplayPage do any of the following:. Scroll through the DIC menu

pages.. Press a Trailer Gain button—If

the Trailer Brake Display Page isnot currently displayed, press aTrailer Gain button to recall thecurrent Trailer Gain setting.Each press and release of thegain buttons will then change theTrailer Gain setting.

. Activate the Manual TrailerBrake Apply Lever.

TRAILER GAIN: This setting can beadjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with eithera trailer connected or disconnected.To adjust the Trailer Gain, press oneof the Trailer Gain Adjustmentbuttons. Press and hold a gainbutton to continuously adjust theTrailer Gain. To turn the output tothe trailer off, adjust the Trailer Gainsetting to 0.0 (zero).

TRAILER OUTPUT: Displays anytime a trailer with electric brakes isconnected. Output to the trailerbrakes is based on the amount ofvehicle braking present and relativeto the Trailer Gain setting. Output isdisplayed from 0 to 100% for eachgain setting.

The Trailer Output will indicate “- - -- - -” on the Trailer Brake DisplayPage whenever the following occur:. No trailer is connected.. A trailer without electric brakes

is connected (no DIC messagedisplayed).



. A trailer with electric brakes hasbecome disconnected (aCHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage will also display onthe DIC).

. There is a fault present in thewiring to the trailer brakes (aCHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage will also display onthe DIC).

. The ITBC system is not workingdue to a fault (a SERVICETRAILER BRAKE SYSTEMmessage will also display inthe DIC).

Manual Trailer Brake Apply

The Manual Trailer Brake ApplyLever is used to apply the trailer’selectric brakes independent of thevehicle’s brakes. Sliding the lever tothe left will apply only the trailerbrakes. Use this lever to adjustTrailer Gain to properly adjust thepower output to the trailer brakes.

The trailer's and the vehicle's brakelamps will come on when eithervehicle brakes or manual trailerbrakes are applied.

Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure

Trailer Gain should be set for aspecific trailering condition and mustbe adjusted any time vehicleloading, trailer loading, or roadsurface conditions change.

{ Warning

Trailer brakes that areover-gained or under-gained maynot stop the vehicle and the traileras intended and can result in acrash. Always follow theinstructions to set the Trailer Gainfor the proper trailer stoppingperformance.

Use the following to adjust TrailerGain for each towing condition:

1. Drive the vehicle with the trailerattached on a level road surfacerepresentative of the towingcondition and free of traffic atabout 32 to 40 km/h (20 to25 mph) and fully apply theManual Trailer Brake ApplyLever.

Adjusting Trailer Gain at speedslower than 32 to 40 km/h (20 to25 mph) may result in anincorrect gain setting.

2. Adjust the Trailer Gain, using theTrailer Gain Adjustment Buttons,to just below the point of trailerwheel lock-up, indicated bytrailer wheel squeal or tiresmoke when a trailer wheellocks.

Trailer wheel lock-up may notoccur if towing a heavily loadedtrailer. In this case, adjust theTrailer Gain to the highestallowable setting for the towingcondition.



3. Readjust Trailer Gain any timevehicle loading, trailer loading,or road surface conditionschange or if trailer wheel lock-upis noticed at any time whiletowing.

Other ITBC-Related DIC Messages

In addition to displaying TRAILERGAIN and OUTPUT through theDIC, trailer connection and ITBCsystem status are displayed onthe DIC.

TRAILER CONNECTED: Thismessage will briefly display when atrailer with electric brakes is firstconnected to the vehicle. Thismessage will automatically turn offin about 10 seconds. This messagecan be acknowledged before itautomatically turns off.

CHECK TRAILER WIRING: Thismessage will display if:

1. The ITBC system firstdetermines connection to atrailer with electric brakes andthen the trailer harness becomesdisconnected from the vehicle.

If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is stationary, thismessage will automatically turnoff in about 30 seconds. Thismessage will also turn off if it isacknowledged or if the trailerharness is reconnected.

If the disconnect occurs whilethe vehicle is moving, thismessage will continue until theignition is turned off. Thismessage will also turn off if it isacknowledged or if the trailerharness is reconnected.

2. There is an electrical fault in thewiring to the trailer brakes. Thismessage will continue as longas there is an electrical fault in

the trailer wiring. This messagewill also turn off if it isacknowledged.

To determine if the electrical fault ison the vehicle side or trailer side ofthe trailer wiring harnessconnection:

1. Disconnect the trailer wiringharness from the vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition off.

3. Wait 10 seconds, then turn theignition back to RUN.

4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage reappears, theelectrical fault is on thevehicle side.

If the CHECK TRAILER WIRINGmessage only reappears whenconnecting the trailer wiringharness to the vehicle, theelectrical fault is on thetrailer side.

SERVICE TRAILER BRAKESYSTEM: This message will displaywhen there is a problem with theITBC system. If this message



continues over multiple ignitioncycles, there is a problem with theITBC system. Have the vehicleserviced.

If either the CHECK TRAILERWIRING or SERVICE TRAILERBRAKE SYSTEM message displayswhile driving, the ITBC system maynot be fully functional or may notfunction at all. When trafficconditions allow, carefully pull thevehicle over to the side of the roadand turn the ignition off. Check thewiring connection to the trailer andturn the ignition back on. If either ofthese messages continues, eitherthe vehicle or trailer needs service.

A GM dealer may be able todiagnose and repair problems withthe trailer. However, any diagnosisand repair of the trailer is notcovered under the vehicle warranty.Contact your trailer dealer forassistance with trailer repairs andtrailer warranty information.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)Vehicles with StabiliTrak have aTSC feature. Trailer sway isunintended side-to-side motion of atrailer while being towed. If thevehicle is towing a trailer and theTSC detects that sway is increasing,the vehicle brakes are selectivelyapplied at each wheel, to helpreduce excessive trailer sway. If thevehicle is equipped with theIntegrated Trailer Brake Control(ITBC) system, and the trailer hasthe electric actuated brake system,StabiliTrak may also apply the trailerbrakes.

If TSC is enabled, the TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrakwarning light will flash on theinstrument cluster. Vehicle speedmust be reduced. If trailer swaycontinues, StabiliTrak can reduceengine torque to help slow thevehicle. See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control onpage 9-50.

{ Warning

Even if the vehicle is equippedwith TSC, trailer sway could resultin loss of control and the vehiclecould crash. If excessive trailersway is detected, slow down to asafe speed. Check the trailer andvehicle to help correct possiblecauses. These could include animproperly or overloaded trailer,unrestrained cargo, impropertrailer hitch configuration,excessive vehicle-trailer speed,or improperly inflated or incorrectvehicle or trailer tires. See TowingEquipment on page 9-80 fortrailer ratings and hitch setuprecommendations.

Adding non-dealer accessories canaffect the vehicle performance. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10-3.



Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipment

{ Caution

Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle or causecomponents to not work andwould not be covered by thewarranty. Always check with yourdealer before adding electricalequipment.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12-volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-29 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3-29.

Adding a Snow Plow orSimilar Equipment

{ Caution

Do not exceed 64 km/h (40 mph)with a snow plow mounted to thevehicle. The vehicle couldoverheat and be damaged.

Before installing a snow plow on thevehicle, here are some things youneed to know:

{ Caution

If the vehicle does not have thesnow plow prep package, addinga plow can damage the vehicle,and the repairs would not becovered by warranty. Unless thevehicle was built to carry a snowplow, do not add one to thevehicle. If the vehicle has thesnow plow prep package, called

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

RPO VYU, then the payload thevehicle can carry will be reducedwhen a snow plow is installed.The vehicle can be damaged ifeither the front or rear axle ratingsor the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) are exceeded.

Some vehicles are built with aspecial snow plow prep package,called RPO VYU. If the vehicle hasthis option, you can add a plow to it,provided certain weights, such asthe weights on the vehicle's axlesand the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR), are not exceeded.

The plow the vehicle can carrydepends on many things, such as:. The options the vehicle came

with, and the weight of thoseoptions.

. The weight and number ofpassengers intended to becarried.



. The weight of items added to thevehicle, like a tool box ortruck cap.

. The total weight of anyadditional cargo intended to becarried.

Say, for example, you have a 318 kg(700 lb) snow plow. The total weightof all occupants and cargo insidethe cab should not exceed 135 kg(300 lb). This means that you mayonly be able to carry one passenger.But, even this may be too much ifthere is other equipment alreadyadding to the weight of the vehicle.

Here are some guidelines for safelycarrying a snow plow on the vehicle:. Make sure the weight on the

front and rear axles does notexceed the axle rating for each.

. For the front axle, if more cargoor passengers must be carried,appropriate counter ballast mustbe installed rear of the rear axle.Counter ballast must be properlysecured so it will not moveduring driving.

. Follow the snow plowmanufacturer'srecommendations regarding rearballast. Rear ballast may berequired to ensure a proper frontand rear weight distribution ratio,even though the actual weight atthe front axle may be less thanthe front axle rating.

. The snow plow manufacturer orinstaller can assist you indetermining the amount of rearballast required, to help makesure the snow plow/vehiclecombination does not exceedthe GVW rating, the front andrear axle ratings, and the frontand rear weight distribution ratio.

. The total vehicle must notexceed the GVW rating.

Front axle reserve capacity is thedifference between the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) and the frontaxle weight of the vehicle with fullfuel and passengers. Basically, it isthe amount of weight that can beadded to the front axle beforereaching the front GAWR.

The front axle reserve capacity forthe vehicle can be found in thelower right corner of theCertification/Tire label, as shown.

United States



Canada

In order to calculate the amount ofweight any front accessory, such asa snow plow, is adding to the frontaxle, use the following formula:

(W x (A +W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight theaccessory is adding to thefront axle.

Where:W = Weight of added accessoryA = Distance that the accessoryis in front of the front axleW.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase

For example, adding a 318 kg(700 lb) snow plow actually addsmore than 318 kg (700 lb) to thefront axle. Using the formula, if thesnow plow is 122 cm (4 ft) in front ofthe front axle and the wheel base is305 cm (10 ft), then:

W = 318 kg (700 lb)A = 122 cm (4 ft)W.B. = 305 cm (10 ft)

(W x (A +W.B.)/W.B. =(318 x (122 + 305))/305 = 445 kg(980 lb)

So, if the front axle reserve capacityis more than 445 kg (980 lb), thesnow plow could be added withoutexceeding the front GAWR.

Heavier equipment can be added onthe front of the vehicle if it iscompensated for by carrying fewerpassengers or less cargo, or bypositioning cargo toward the rear.This has the effect of reducing theload on the front. However, the frontGAWR, rear GAWR, and GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) mustnever be exceeded.



{ Warning

On some vehicles that havecertain front mounted equipment,such as a snow plow, it may bepossible to load the front axle tothe front gross axle weight rating(GAWR) but not have enoughweight on the rear axle to haveproper braking performance. If thebrakes cannot work properly, youcould have a crash. To help thebrakes work properly when asnow plow is installed, alwaysfollow the snow plowmanufacturer or installer'srecommendation for rear ballastto ensure a proper front and rearweight distribution ratio, eventhough the actual front weightmay be less than the frontGAWR, and the total vehicleweight is less than the grossvehicle weight rating (GVWR).Maintaining a proper front and

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

rear weight distribution ratio isnecessary to provide properbraking performance.

Total vehicle reserve capacity is thedifference between the GVWR andthe weight of the truck with full fueland passengers. It is the amount ofweight that can be added to thevehicle before reaching the GVWR.Keep in mind that reserve capacitynumbers are intended as a guidewhen selecting the amount ofequipment or cargo the truck cancarry. If unsure of the vehicle's front,rear, or total weight, go to a weighstation and weigh the vehicle. Yourdealer can also help with this.

The total vehicle reserve capacityfor the vehicle can be found in thelower right corner of theCertification/Tire label as shownpreviously.

See your dealer for additionaladvice and information about usinga snow plow on the vehicle. Also,see Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.

Emergency Roof LampProvisions

Vehicles with the RPO VYU snowplow prep package also have anemergency roof lamp provisionpackage, RPO TRW. Wiring for theemergency roof lamp is providedabove the overhead console. SeeAuxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp onpage 6-5 for switch location.



Pickup Conversion toChassis CabWe are aware that some vehicleowners might consider having thepickup box removed and acommercial or recreational bodyinstalled. Owners should be awarethat, as manufactured, there aredifferences between a chassis caband a pickup with the box removedwhich could affect vehicle safety.The components necessary to adapta pickup to permit its safe use witha specialized body should beinstalled by the body builder.


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-11Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-15Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-21Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode(6.0L V8 Engine Only) . . . . . 10-23

Engine Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Power Steering Fluid (1500Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Power Steering Fluid (2500/3500 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Noise Control System . . . . . . 10-32Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-33Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-34

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-35

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-38Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44

Instrument Panel Fuse Block(Right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46


10-2 Vehicle Care

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-51Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Dual Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . 10-65When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-71Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-82

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Towing the VehicleTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-87Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California to


Vehicle Care 10-3

cause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, safety belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride and

handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-29.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ Warning

It can be dangerous to work onyour vehicle if you do not havethe proper knowledge, servicemanual, tools, or parts. Alwaysfollow owner manual proceduresand consult the service manualfor your vehicle before doing anyservice work.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13-11.


10-4 Vehicle Care

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3-29.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11-16.

{ Caution

Even small amounts ofcontamination can cause damageto vehicle systems. Do not allowcontaminants to contact the fluids,reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the handle with this symbolon it. It is inside the vehicleunder the steering wheel.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle tofind the secondary hood release.The handle is under the frontedge of the hood near thecenter. Push the handle to theright and at the same time raisethe hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure allthe filler caps are on properly. Thenbring the hood from full open towithin 15 cm (6 in) from the closedposition, pause, and push the frontcenter of the hood with a swift, firmmotion to fully close the hood.


Vehicle Care 10-5

Engine Compartment Overview

5.3L V8 Engine Shown, 6.2L V8 Engine Similar


10-6 Vehicle Care

1. Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 10-83.

2. Battery on page 10-28.

3. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10-16.

4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-15.

5. Automatic TransmissionDipstick. See “How to Check theAutomatic Transmission Fluid”under Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10-12.

6. Remote Negative (-) Location.See Jump Starting onpage 10-83.

7. Engine Cooling Fans (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10-16.

8. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 10-8.

9. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10-8.

10. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10-25.

11. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid on page 10-27.

12. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-40.


Vehicle Care 10-7

6.0L V8 Engine


10-8 Vehicle Care

1. Positive (+) Terminal. See JumpStarting on page 10-83.

2. Battery on page 10-28.

3. Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10-16.

4. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-15.

5. Automatic TransmissionDipstick. See “How to Check theAutomatic Transmission Fluid”under Automatic TransmissionFluid on page 10-12.

6. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10-8.

7. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” under EngineOil on page 10-8.

8. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10-16.

9. Remote Negative (–) Location.See Jump Starting onpage 10-83.

10. Power Steering FluidReservoir. See Power SteeringFluid (2500/3500 Series) onpage 10-24 or Power SteeringFluid (1500 Series) onpage 10-24.

11. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10-25.

12. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrake Fluid on page 10-27.

13. Auxiliary Battery (If Equipped).See Battery on page 10-28.

14. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10-40.

If the vehicle has a diesel engineand/or an Allison Transmission, seethe Duramax diesel supplement.

Engine OilFor diesel engine vehicles, see“Engine Oil” in the Duramax dieselsupplement.

To ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10-11.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.


Vehicle Care 10-9

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine oil dipstick.

If a low oil message displays on theDIC, it is important to park on levelground to accurately measure theoil level on the dipstick. Idling thevehicle on steep grades for a longtime can influence the level sensingaccuracy.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

{ Warning

The engine oil dipstick handlemay be hot; it could burn you.Use a towel or glove to touch thedipstick handle.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation of

what kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2.

{ Caution

Do not add too much oil. Oillevels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1® approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.

{ Caution

Failure to use the recommendedengine oil can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 0W-20 is the best viscositygrade for the 5.3L and 6.2L engines.SAE 5W-30 is the best viscositygrade for the 6.0L engine. Do notuse other viscosity grade oils suchas SAE 10W-30, 10W-40,or 20W-50.

Cold Temperature Operation: In anarea of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −29°C(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may beused in the 6.0L engine. An oil ofthis viscosity grade will provideeasier cold starting for the engine atextremely low temperatures. Whenselecting an oil of the appropriateviscosity grade, always select an oilof the correct specification. See“Specification” earlier in this sectionfor more information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 10-11

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.

On some vehicles, when the systemhas calculated that oil life has beendiminished, a CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on toindicate that an oil change isnecessary. See Engine OilMessages on page 5-31. Changethe oil as soon as possible withinthe next 1 000 km (600mi). It ispossible that, if driving under thebest conditions, the oil life systemmight indicate that an oil change isnot necessary for up to a year. The

engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and,at this time, the system must bereset. For vehicles without theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage, an oil change is neededwhen the OIL LIFE REMAININGpercentage is near 0%. Your dealerhas trained service people who willperform this work and reset thesystem. It is also important to checkthe oil regularly over the course ofan oil drain interval and keep it atthe proper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.


10-12 Vehicle Care

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. Always reset theengine oil life to 100% after every oilchange. It will not reset itself. Toreset the engine oil life system:

1. Display the OIL LIFEREMAINING on the DIC. SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-26.

2. Press and hold V for severalseconds. The oil life will changeto 100%.

The oil life system can also be resetas follows:


2. Fully press the accelerator pedalslowly three times withinfive seconds.

3. Display the OIL LIFEREMAINING on the DIC. If thedisplay shows 100%, the systemis reset.

If the vehicle has a CHANGEENGINE OIL SOON message and itcomes back on when the vehicle isstarted and/or the OIL LIFEREMAINING is near 0%, the engineoil life system has not been reset.Repeat the procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

When to Check and ChangeAutomatic Transmission Fluid

It is usually not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level. The onlyreason for fluid loss is atransmission leak or overheatedtransmission. If a small leak issuspected, then use the followingchecking procedures to check thefluid level. However, if there is alarge leak, then it may be necessaryto have the vehicle towed to a

dealer service department and haveit repaired before driving the vehiclefurther.

{ Caution

Use of the incorrect automatictransmission fluid may damagethe vehicle, and the damage maynot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use theautomatic transmission fluid listedin Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Change the fluid and filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalslisted in Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3. Be sure to use thetransmission fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.


Vehicle Care 10-13

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

{ Caution

Too much or too little fluid candamage the transmission. Toomuch can mean that some of thefluid could come out and fall onhot engine parts or exhaustsystem parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause thetransmission to overheat. Be sureto get an accurate reading ifchecking the transmission fluid.

Before checking the fluid level,prepare the vehicle:

1. Start the engine and park thevehicle on a level surface. Keepthe engine running.

2. Apply the parking brake andplace the shift lever in P (Park).

3. With your foot on the brakepedal, move the shift leverthrough each gear range,

pausing for about three secondsin each range. Then, move theshift lever back to P (Park).

4. Allow the engine to idle (500–800 rpm) for at least one minute.Slowly release the brake pedal.

5. Keep the engine running andcheck the transmission fluidtemperature on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)on page 5-26.

6. Using the transmission fluidtemperature reading, determineand perform the appropriatecheck procedure. If thetransmission fluid temperaturereading is not within the requiredtemperature ranges, allow thevehicle to cool, or operate thevehicle until the appropriatetransmission fluid temperature isreached.

Cold Check Procedure

Use this procedure only as areference to determine if thetransmission has enough fluid to beoperated safely until a hot checkprocedure can be made. The hotcheck procedure is the mostaccurate method to check the fluidlevel. Perform the hot checkprocedure at the first opportunity.Use this cold check procedure tocheck fluid level when thetransmission temperature isbetween 27°C and 32°C (80°F and90°F).

1. Locate the transmission dipstickat the rear of the enginecompartment, on the passengerside of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10-5.


10-14 Vehicle Care

2. Flip the handle up, then pull outthe dipstick and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushing itback in all the way; waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstickand read the lower level. Repeatthe check procedure to verify thereading.

5. If the fluid level is below theCOLD check band, add onlyenough fluid as necessary tobring the level into the COLDband. It does not take muchfluid, generally less than 0.5 L(1 pt). Do not overfill.

6. Perform a hot check at the firstopportunity after thetransmission reaches a normaloperating temperature between71°C to 93°C (160°F to 200°F).

7. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way, thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.

Hot Check Procedure

Use this procedure to check thetransmission fluid level when thetransmission fluid temperature isbetween 71°C and 93°C (160°F and200°F).

The hot check is the most accuratemethod to check the fluid level. Thehot check should be performed atthe first opportunity in order to verifythe cold check. The fluid level risesas fluid temperature increases, so itis important to ensure thetransmission temperature is withinrange.

1. Locate the transmission dipstickat the rear of the enginecompartment, on the passengerside of the vehicle.

See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10-5.

2. Flip the handle up, then pull outthe dipstick and wipe it with aclean rag or paper towel.

3. Install the dipstick by pushing itback in all the way; waitthree seconds, and then pull itback out again.

4. Check both sides of the dipstickand read the lower level. Repeatthe check procedure to verify thereading.


Vehicle Care 10-15

5. Safe operating level is within theHOT cross hatch band on thedipstick. If the fluid level is notwithin the HOT band, and thetransmission temperature isbetween 71°C and 93°C (160°Fand 200°F), add or drain fluid asnecessary to bring the level intothe HOT band. If the fluid level islow, add only enough fluid tobring the level into the HOTband. It does not take muchfluid, generally less than 0.5 L(1 pt). Do not overfill.

6. If the fluid level is in theacceptable range, push thedipstick back in all the way, thenflip the handle down to lock thedipstick in place.

Consistency of Readings

Always check the fluid level at leasttwice using the procedure describedpreviously. Consistency (repeatablereadings) is important to maintainingproper fluid level. If readings are stillinconsistent, contact the dealer.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see “Pickup Models” under “EngineAir Cleaner/Filter” in the Duramaxdiesel supplement for the correctinspection and replacementprocedures.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)

interval. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11-3. If driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the engine air cleaner/filterfrom the vehicle by followingSteps 1−8. When the engine aircleaner/filter is removed, lightlyshake it to release loose dust anddirt. If the engine air cleaner/filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required. Never usecompressed air to clean the filter.


10-16 Vehicle Care

Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

1. Screws

2. Electrical Connector

3. Air Duct Clamp

1. Locate the air cleaner/filterassembly. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5.

2. Disconnect the outlet duct byloosening the air duct clamp (3).

3. Disconnect the electricalconnector (2) and the connectorharness from the cover.

4. Remove the four screws (1) ontop of the cover of the housingand lift up the cover.

5. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Take careto dislodge as little dirt aspossible.

6. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and thehousing.

7. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

8. Reverse Steps 2–4 to reinstallthe filter cover housing.

{ Warning

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; it

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

helps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

{ Caution

If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirtcan easily get into the engine,which could damage it. Alwayshave the air cleaner/filter in placewhen you are driving.

Cooling SystemIf the vehicle has the Duramax®

diesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement for moreinformation.

The cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.


Vehicle Care 10-17

5.3L V8 Engine Shown, 6.2LV8 Engine Similar

1. Coolant Surge Tank

2. Coolant Surge TankPressure Cap

3. Engine Cooling Fan

6.0L V8 Engine

1. Coolant Surge Tank

2. Coolant Surge TankPressure Cap

3. Engine Cooling Fan

{ Warning

An electric engine cooling fan canstart even when the engine is notrunning. To avoid injury, alwayskeep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any enginecooling fan.

{ Warning

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

{ Caution

Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can causepremature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant could requirechanging sooner. Any repairswould not be covered by the

(Continued)


10-18 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

vehicle warranty. Always useDEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolantin the vehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10-21.

What to Use

{ Warning

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

{ Caution

If improper coolant mixture,inhibitors, or additives are used inthe vehicle cooling system, theengine could overheat and bedamaged. Too much water in the

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-19

Caution (Continued)

mixture can freeze and crackengine cooling parts. The repairswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Use only theproper mixture of engine coolantfor the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, or by pouringit on the ground, or into sewers,streams, or bodies of water. Havethe coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.

Checking Coolant

The coolant surge tank is in theengine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-5.

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at orabove the FULL COLD mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system is cool before thisis done.

5.3L V8 Engine Shown, 6.2LV8 Engine Similar

6.0L V8 Engine


10-20 Vehicle Care

The coolant level should be at orabove the FULL COLD mark. If it isnot, there may be a leak in thecooling system.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

If the vehicle has a diesel engine,see “Cooling System” in theDuramax diesel supplement for theproper coolant fill procedure.

{ Warning

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

{ Caution

This vehicle has a specificcoolant fill procedure. Failure tofollow this procedure could causethe engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

{ Warning

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. Never turnthe cap when the cooling system,including the surge tank pressurecap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and surge tank pressurecap to cool.

If no coolant is visible in the surgetank, add coolant.

Light-DutyCoolant Surge

TankPressure Cap

Heavy-DutyCoolant Surge

TankPressure Cap

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise about one fullturn. If a hiss is heard, wait forthat to stop. A hiss means thereis still some pressure left.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper mixture to the FULLCOLD mark.


Vehicle Care 10-21

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theengine coolant temperaturegauge indicates approximately90°C (195°F).

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the propermixture to the coolant surge tankuntil the level reaches the FULLCOLD mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.

6. Verify coolant level after theengine is shut off and thecoolant is cold. If necessary,repeat coolant fill procedureSteps 1-6.

{ Caution

If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss andpossible engine damage mayoccur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

Engine OverheatingIf the vehicle has the Duramaxdiesel engine, see the Duramaxdiesel supplement.

The vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is a coolant temperaturegauge in the vehicle's instrumentcluster. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5-13.

In addition, there are ENGINEOVERHEATED STOP ENGINE,ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLEENGINE, and ENGINE POWER ISREDUCED messages in the Driver

Information Center (DIC). SeeEngine Cooling System Messageson page 5-31 and Engine PowerMessages on page 5-32.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. SeeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-5.

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fan is running. If the engineis overheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, do not continueto run the engine and have thevehicle serviced.

{ Caution

Running the engine withoutcoolant may cause damage or afire. Vehicle damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

(Continued)


10-22 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode (6.0LV8 Engine Only) on page 10-23for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ Warning

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Turn it offand get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Waituntil there is no sign of steam orcoolant before you openthe hood.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

If you keep driving when thevehicles engine is overheated,the liquids in it can catch fire. Youor others could be badly burned.Stop the engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until theengine is cool.

See Overheated EngineProtection Operating Mode (6.0LV8 Engine Only) on page 10-23for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

The ENGINE OVERHEATED STOPENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage, along with a low coolantcondition, can indicate a seriousproblem.

If there is an engine overheatwarning, but no steam is seen orheard, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine canget a little too hot when the vehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer; see Trailer Towing

on page 9-73.

If the ENGINE OVERHEATEDSTOP ENGINE or the ENGINEOVERHEATED IDLE ENGINEmessage appears with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. When it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.


Vehicle Care 10-23

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normallyand have the cooling systemchecked for proper fill and function.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam andthe vehicle is equipped with anengine driven cooling fan, pushdown the accelerator until theengine speed is about twice as fastas normal idle speed for at leastfive minutes while the vehicle isparked. If the warning is still there,turn off the engine and get everyoneout of the vehicle until it cools down.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for five minutes whileparked. If the warning is still

displayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”following.

Overheated EngineProtection OperatingMode (6.0LV8 Engine Only)If an overheated engine conditionexists and the ENGINE POWER ISREDUCED message displays, anoverheat protection mode whichalternates firing groups of cylindershelps to prevent engine damage. Inthis mode, a loss in power andengine performance will be noticed.This operating mode allows thevehicle to be driven to a safe placein an emergency. Driving extendeddistances and/or towing a trailer inthe overheat protection modeshould be avoided.

{ Caution

After driving in the overheatedengine protection operatingmode, the engine oil will beseverely degraded. Any repairsperformed before the engine iscool may cause engine damage.Allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. Repair thecause of coolant loss, change theoil, and reset the oil life system.See Engine Oil on page 10-8.

Engine FanIf the vehicle has a clutched enginecooling fan, when the clutch isengaged, the fan spins faster toprovide more air to cool the engine.In most everyday driving conditions,the fan is spinning slower and theclutch is not fully engaged. Thisimproves fuel economy and reducesfan noise. Under heavy vehicleloading, trailer towing, and/or highoutside temperatures, the fan speed


10-24 Vehicle Care

increases as the clutch more fullyengages, so an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland should not be mistaken as thetransmission slipping or makingextra shifts. It is merely the coolingsystem functioning properly. The fanwill slow down when additionalcooling is not required and theclutch disengages.

This fan noise may also be heardwhen starting the engine. It will goaway as the fan clutch partiallydisengages.

If the vehicle has electric coolingfans, the fans may be heardspinning at low speed during mosteveryday driving. The fans may turnoff if no cooling is required. Underheavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,high outside temperatures,or operation of the air conditioningsystem, the fans may change tohigh speed and an increase in fannoise may be heard. This is normaland indicates that the coolingsystem is functioning properly. The

fans will change to low speed whenadditional cooling is no longerrequired.

The electric engine cooling fansmay run after the engine has beenturned. off. This is normal and noservice is required.

Power Steering Fluid(1500 Series)The vehicle has electric powersteering and does not use powersteering fluid.

Power Steering Fluid(2500/3500 Series)

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10-5 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering fluid unlessthere is a leak suspected in thesystem or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss in this systemcould indicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

Wait for the power steering systemto cool, with the engine off, beforechecking the fluid.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the key off and let theengine compartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.


Vehicle Care 10-25

5. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The level should be between theADD and FULL marks. If necessary,add only enough fluid to bring thelevel up to the hashed area betweenthe ADD and FULL marks.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, see Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12. Alwaysuse the proper fluid.

{ Caution

Use of the incorrect fluid maydamage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Always usethe correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid needsto be added, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. Use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

The vehicle has a low washer fluidmessage on the DIC that comes onwhen the washer fluid is low. Themessage is displayed for15 seconds at the start of eachignition cycle. When the WASHERFLUID LOW ADD FLUID messagedisplays, washer fluid will need tobe added to the windshield washerfluid reservoir.

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5 for reservoir location.

{ Caution

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.

(Continued)


10-26 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer instructions foradding water.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs,which could damage the tankif it is completely full.

BrakesThis vehicle has front and rear discbrakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ Warning

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

{ Caution

Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costlybrake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in the

proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to get


Vehicle Care 10-27

new, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-5 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ Warning

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem. See “Checking BrakeFluid” in this section.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5-20.

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to check thebrake fluid. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11-3.

Checking Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid by looking at thebrake fluid reservoir. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5.


10-28 Vehicle Care

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brakehydraulic system checked to see ifthere is a leak.

After work is done on the brakehydraulic system, make sure thelevel is above MIN but not over theMAX mark.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ Warning

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

{ Caution

. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system can damagebrake hydraulic system partsso badly that they will have to

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

be replaced. Do not letsomeone put in the wrongkind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numbershown on the original battery labelwhen a new battery is needed. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10-5 for battery location.


Vehicle Care 10-29

{ Warning

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ Warning

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10-83 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

Four-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3 to determine when tocheck the lubricant.

How to Check Lubricant


1. Fill Plug

2. Drain Plug


10-30 Vehicle Care


1. Fill Plug

2. Drain Plug

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug (1) hole, located on thetransfer case, some lubricant willneed to be added. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug (1) hole. Usecare not to overtighten the plug.

When to Change Lubricant

Refer to Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3 to determine how often tochange the lubricant.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12 todetermine what kind of lubricantto use.

Front AxleWhen to Check and ChangeLubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck front axle fluid unless a leakis suspected, or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.


To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

1500 Series

1. Fill Plug

2. Drain Plug


Vehicle Care 10-31

All Except 1500 Series

1. Fill Plug

2. Drain Plug. When the differential is cold, add

enough lubricant to raise thelevel from 0 mm (0 in) to 3.2 mm(1/8 in) below the fillplug (1) hole.

. When the differential is atoperating temperature (warm),add enough lubricant to raise thelevel to the bottom of the fillplug (1) hole.

What to Use


Rear Axle

When to Check Lubricant

It is not necessary to regularlycheck rear axle fluid unless a leak issuspected or an unusual noise isheard. A fluid loss could indicate aproblem. Have it inspected andrepaired.

All axle assemblies are filled byvolume of fluid during production.They are not filled to reach a certainlevel. When checking the fluid levelon any axle, variations in thereadings can be caused by factoryfill differences between the minimumand the maximum fluid volume.

Also, if a vehicle has just beendriven before checking the fluidlevel, it may appear lower thannormal because fluid has traveledout along the axle tubes and hasnot drained back to the sump area.Therefore, a reading takenfive minutes after the vehicle hasbeen driven will appear to have alower fluid level than a vehicle thathas been stationary for an hour ortwo. Remember that the rear axleassembly must be supported to geta true reading.


10-32 Vehicle Care


2500HD with 6.0L

All Other Series and Engines

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.. For 6.2L 1500 Series

applications, the proper level isfrom 15 mm to 40 mm (0.6 in to1.6 in) below the bottom of thefill plug hole, located on the rearaxle. Add only enough fluid toreach the proper level.

. For all 6.0L 2500HD Seriesapplications, the proper level isfrom 0 mm to 13 mm (0 to 0.5 in)below the bottom of the fill plughole, located on the rear axle.Add only enough fluid to reachthe proper level.

. For all 6.6L Duramax Diesel2500HD Series applications andall 3500 Series applications, theproper level is from 17 mm to21 mm (0.6 in to 0.8 in) belowthe bottom of the fill plug hole,located on the rear axle. Addonly enough fluid to reach theproper level.

What to Use


Noise Control SystemThe following information relates tocompliance with federal noiseemission standards for vehicles witha Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) of more than 4 536 kg(10,000 lb). The noise controlsystem warranty is given in yourwarranty manual.

These standards apply only tovehicles sold in the United States.

Federal law prohibits the followingacts or the causing thereof:

1. The removal or renderinginoperative by any person, otherthan for purposes ofmaintenance, repair orreplacement, of any device orelement of design incorporatedinto any new vehicle for the


Vehicle Care 10-33

purpose of noise control, prior toits sale or delivery to the ultimatepurchaser or while it is in use; or

2. The use of the vehicle after suchdevice or element of design hasbeen removed or renderedinoperative by any person.

Among those acts presumed toconstitute tampering are the actslisted below.

Insulation:

Removal of the noise shields or anyunderhood insulation.

Engine:

Removal or rendering engine speedgovernor, if the vehicle has one,inoperative so as to allow enginespeed to exceed manufacturerspecifications.

Fan and Drive:. Removal of fan clutch, if the

vehicle has one, or renderingclutch inoperative.

. Removal of the fan shroud, if thevehicle has one.

Air Intake:. Removal of the air cleaner

silencer.. Modification of the air cleaner.

Exhaust:. Removal of the muffler and/or

resonator.. Removal of the exhaust pipes

and exhaust pipe clamps.

Starter Switch Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Apply both the parking brakeand the regular brake.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ Warning

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.


10-34 Vehicle Care

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Apply the parking brake. Beready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle beginsto move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckIf equipped with a key type ignition,while parked and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.

. The ignition should turn toLOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ Warning

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear or cracking. SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3.


Vehicle Care 10-35

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For properwindshield wiper blade length andtype, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11-15.

{ Caution

Allowing the wiper arm to touchthe windshield when no wiperblade is installed could damagethe windshield. Any damage thatoccurs would not be covered byyour warranty. Do not allow thewiper arm to touch the windshield.

To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Pull the windshield wiperassembly away from thewindshield.

2. Press the button (2) in themiddle of the wiper armconnector, and pull the wiperblade away from the armconnector (1).

3. Remove the wiper blade.

4. Reverse Steps 1–3 for wiperblade replacement.

Glass ReplacementIf the windshield or front side glassmust be replaced, see your dealerto determine the correctreplacement glass.

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset andshould need no further adjustment.

If the vehicle is damaged in a crash,the headlamp aim may be affected.If adjustment to the headlamps isnecessary, see your dealer.


10-36 Vehicle Care

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10-38.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{ Warning

Halogen bulbs have pressurizedgas inside and can burst if youdrop or scratch the bulb. You orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the instructionson the bulb package.

LED LightingThis vehicle has several LED lamps.For replacement of any LED lightingassembly, contact your dealer.

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps

Driver Side

1. Front Turn Signal/Sidemarker/Parking Lamp

2. High/Low-Beam Headlamp

See your dealer for passenger sidereplacement.

Headlamp

1. Open the hood.

2. Remove the headlamp bulbassembly cover by turning itcounterclockwise.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the headlamp assemblyand pull it straight out.

4. Unplug the electrical connectorfrom the old bulb by releasingthe clip on the bulb socket.

Turn Signal/Sidemarker/Parking Lamp

1. Open the hood.

2. If replacing a bulb on thepassenger side, remove theengine air cleaner.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the headlamp assemblyand pull it straight out.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of the bulb socket.


Vehicle Care 10-37

Fog LampsTo replace the front fog lamp bulb:

1. Locate the fog lamp under thefront bumper.

2. Disconnect the electricalconnector from the fog lamp bulbassembly by pressing theconnector release.

3. Remove the bulb from thehousing by squeezing the tworelease tabs and pulling itstraight out of the assembly.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps

Single Rear Wheel Lamp Shown,Dual Rear Wheel Lamp Similar

1. Stoplamp/Taillamp/TurnSignal Lamp

2. Back-Up Lamp

3. Sidemarker Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the tailgate.

2. Remove the two rear lampassembly screws and pullrearward until disengaging thetwo outer pins on the taillampassembly from the vehicle.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove itfrom the taillamp assembly.

4. Pull the bulb straight out fromthe socket.


10-38 Vehicle Care

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp

1. Cargo Lamps

2. Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) Bulb

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Remove the two screws and liftoff the lamp assembly.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull itstraight out.

3. Pull the bulb straight out fromthe socket.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Locate the license plate lampunder the rear bumper.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull itstraight out.

3. Pull the bulb straight out of thesocket.

Replacement BulbsExterior Lamp Bulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp 921 (W16W)

Back-Up Lamp* 1156

Cargo Lamp 921 (W16W)

CenterHigh-MountedStoplamp(CHMSL)

921LL

Fog Lamp PS24W

Front Turn SignalLamp andParking Lamp

7443 LL

High/Low-BeamHeadlamp

HIR–2(9012 LL)


Vehicle Care 10-39

Exterior Lamp BulbNumber

LicensePlate Lamp

W5W LL

RearSidemarker Lamp

194

Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamp

7444 LL

Stoplamp/TurnSignal Lamp/Taillamp*

1157

* Chassis Cab Models

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses to protectagainst an electrical systemoverload. Fuses also protect powerdevices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thereare some spare fuses and a fusepuller in the Instrument Panel FuseBlock. The same amperage fusecan also be borrowed. Choosesome feature of the vehicle that isnot needed to use and replace it assoon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.


10-40 Vehicle Care

FusesThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reduces thechance of fires caused by electricalproblems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureyou replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperage canbe temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fuse goesout. Replace the fuse as soon asyou can.

Engine CompartmentFuse BlockIf the vehicle has a diesel engine,see the Duramax dieselsupplement.

The engine compartment fuse blockis in the engine compartment, onthe driver side of the vehicle.

Lift the cover to access the fuseblock.

{ Caution

Spilling liquid on any electricalcomponent on the vehicle maydamage it. Always keep thecovers on any electricalcomponent.

A fuse puller is available in the leftinstrument panel fuse block.


Vehicle Care 10-41

MicroJ-CaseFuses

Usage

1 Trailer Brake

2 Trailer Battery

J-CaseFuses

Usage

3 Antilock BrakeSystem Pump

4 Instrument PanelBEC 1

5 Spare

6 4WD Trec

7 Spare

8 Instrument PanelBEC 2

9 Spare

10 Rear WindowDefogger

11 Starter

12 Cooling Fan 1


10-42 Vehicle Care

J-CaseFuses

Usage

13 Cooling Fan 2

Mini Fuses(2 Pin)

Usage

14 Trailer Stop/TurnLamps, Left

15 Trailer Park Lamps

16 TrailerBack-up Lamp

17 Trailer Stop/TurnLamps, Right

Micro Fuses(2 Pin)

Usage

18 Fuel Pump

19 Integrated ChassisControl Module

20 ElectronicSuspensionControl Module

Micro Fuses(2 Pin)

Usage

21 Fuel Pump PowerModule

22 Upfitter Switch 1

23 Upfitter 2

24 Front Wiper

25 Antilock BrakeSystem Valves

26 Upfitter SW 2

27 Upfitter SW 3

28 Parking Lamps,Right

29 ParkingLamps, Left

30 Upfitter 3

31 Upfitter SW 4

32 Upfitter 4

33 Back-up Lamps

34 Engine ControlModule Ignition

Micro Fuses(2 Pin)

Usage

35 Air ConditioningCompressor Clutch

36 Heated Mirrors

37 Upfitter 1

38 CenterHigh-MountedStoplamp

39 MiscellaneousIgnition

40 TransmissionIgnition

41 Fuel Pump 2

42 Cooling Fan Clutch

43 Engine

44 Fuel InjectorsA, Odd

45 Fuel InjectorsB, Even

46 Oxygen Sensor B

47 Throttle Control


Vehicle Care 10-43

Micro Fuses(2 Pin)

Usage

48 Horn

49 Fog Lamp

50 Oxygen Sensor A

51 Engine ControlModule

52 Interior Heater

53 Spare

54 Aeroshutter

55 Front Washer

Micro Fuses(3 Pin)

Usage

56 Air ConditioningCompressor/Battery RegulatedVoltage Control

57 Air ConditioningCompressorModule/Battery Pack

Micro Fuses(3 Pin)

Usage

58 TransmissionControl Module/Engine ControlModule

59 Headlamps

MicroRelays

Usage

60 Fuel Pump

61 Upfitter 2

62 Upfitter 3

63 Upfitter 4

64 Trailer Park Lamps

65 Run/Crank

66 Upfitter 1

67 Fuel Pump 2

68 Air ConditioningControl

69 Starter

Mini Relays Usage

70 Rear WindowDefogger

71 Engine ControlModule

Solid StateRelay

Usage

72 Cooling Fan Clutch


10-44 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Left)

The left instrument panel fuse blockaccess door is on the driver sideedge of the instrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


Vehicle Care 10-45

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Number Usage

1 Accessory PowerOutlet 2

2 SEO RetainedAccessory Power

3 Universal GarageDoor Opener/InsideRearview Mirror

6 Body ControlModule 3


8 Driver WindowSwitch/Mirror Switch


10 Accessory PowerOutlet RetainedAccessory Power

11 Accessory PowerOutlet Battery

Number Usage

12 Retained AccessoryPower/Accessory

13 Discrete Logic IgnitionSwitch

14 Switch Backlighting


19 Spare

20 Spare

22 Heater, Ventilationand Air Conditioning/Auxiliary Heater,Ventilation and AirConditioning Ignition

23 Instrument ClusterIgnition/SensingDiagnostic ModuleIgnition

24 Spare

25 Airbag/Info

Number Usage

26 Passive EntryPassive Start/Heater,Ventilation and AirConditioning

27 Spare

28 Spare

29 Park Enable/Electrically AdjustablePedals

30 SEO

31 Accessory/Run Crank

32 Heated SteeringWheel

33 Spare

34 Instrument Cluster

36 Spare

37 Spare

40 Left Doors

41 Driver Power Seat


10-46 Vehicle Care

Number Usage

43 Left Front Heated/Cooled Seat

44 Amplifier

45 Spare

49 Accessory PowerOutlet 1/CigaretteLighter

50 Run/Crank

Instrument Panel FuseBlock (Right)

The right instrument panel fuseblock access door is on thepassenger side edge of theinstrument panel.

Pull off the cover to access the fuseblock.


Vehicle Care 10-47

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Number Usage





9 Rear SeatEntertainment

10 Cargo Lamp

15 Steering WheelControls

18 Radio

19 Spare

20 Sunroof

23 Data Link Connector/Driver Seat Module


10-48 Vehicle Care

Number Usage

26 Export/Power TakeOff/SEO Battery 1

27 Obstacle Detection/USB Ports


32 SEO Battery 2

35 AC Inverter

36 Right Front Heated/Cooled Seat

37 Spare

39 Rear Sliding Window

42 Right Door WindowMotor

Number Usage

43 Front Blower

44 TPIM2/SEO


46 Spare

47 Passenger Seat

50 Retained AccessoryPower/Accessory

51 Rear SlidingWindow Open

52 Rear Sliding WindowClose

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ Warning

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-49

Warning (Continued)

and a serious crash. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.

. Underinflated tires posethe same danger asoverloaded tires. Theresulting crash couldcause serious injury.Check all tires frequentlyto maintain therecommended pressure.Tire pressure should bechecked when the tiresare cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keeptires at the recommendedpressure.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

. Worn or old tires cancause a crash. If the treadis badly worn,replace them.

. Replace any tires thathave been damaged byimpacts with potholes,curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Onlythe dealer or anauthorized tire servicecenter should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 56 km/h(35 mph) on slipperysurfaces such as snow,mud, ice, etc. Excessivespinning may cause thetires to explode.

All-Season TiresThis vehicle may come withall-season tires. These tires aredesigned to provide good overallperformance on most road surfacesand weather conditions. Originalequipment tires designed to GM'sspecific tire performance criteriahave a TPC specification codemolded onto the sidewall. Originalequipment all-season tires can beidentified by the last two charactersof this TPC code, which willbe “MS.”

Consider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice-covered roads isexpected. All-season tires provideadequate performance for mostwinter driving conditions, but theymay not offer the same level oftraction or performance as wintertires on snow or ice-covered roads.See Winter Tires on page 10-50.


10-50 Vehicle Care

Winter TiresThis vehicle was not originallyequipped with winter tires. Wintertires are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice-coveredroads. Consider installing wintertires on the vehicle if frequentdriving on ice or snow coveredroads is expected. See your dealerfor details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection.Also, see Buying New Tires onpage 10-67.

With winter tires, there may bedecreased dry road traction,increased road noise, and shortertread life. After changing to wintertires, be alert for changes in vehiclehandling and braking.

If using winter tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Low-Profile TiresIf the vehicle has P275/55R20,P285/50R20, or P285/45R22size tires, they are classified aslow-profile tires.

{ Caution

Low-profile tires are moresusceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact thanstandard profile tires. Tire and/orwheel assembly damage can

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

occur when coming into contactwith road hazards like potholes,or sharp edged objects, or whensliding into a curb. The warrantydoes not cover this type ofdamage. Keep tires set to thecorrect inflation pressure andwhen possible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other roadhazards.

All-Terrain TiresThis vehicle may have all-terraintires. These tires provide goodperformance on most road surfaces,weather conditions, and for off-roaddriving. See Off-Road Driving onpage 9-6.

The tread pattern on these tires maywear more quickly than other tires.Consider rotating the tires morefrequently than at 12 000 km(7,500 mi) intervals if irregular wear


Vehicle Care 10-51

is noted when the tires areinspected. See Tire Inspection onpage 10-63.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into the sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger and light truck tiresidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric)/Spare Tire

(1) Tire Size: The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define a

particular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(4) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(5) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.


10-52 Vehicle Care

(6) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform TireQuality Grading on page 10-69.

(7) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10-57 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15.

(8) Temporary Use Only: Onlyuse a temporary spare tire untilthe road tire is repaired andreplaced. This spare tire shouldnot be driven on over 112 km/h(70 mph), or 88 km/h (55 mph)when pulling a trailer, with the

proper inflation pressure. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire onpage 10-82.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(1) Tire Size: The tire size codeis a combination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(2) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(3) Dual Tire Maximum Load:Maximum load that can becarried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used in a dualconfiguration. For information onrecommended tire pressure seeTire Pressure on page 10-57and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.

(4) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with the


Vehicle Care 10-53

U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

DOT Tire Date ofManufacture: The last fourdigits of the TIN indicate the tiremanufactured date. The first twodigits represent the week(01-52) and the last two digits,the year. For example, the thirdweek of the year 2010 wouldhave a four-digit DOT dateof 0310.

(5) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(6) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(7) Single Tire MaximumLoad: Maximum load that canbe carried and the maximumpressure needed to support thatload when used as a single. Forinformation on recommendedtire pressure see Tire Pressureon page 10-57 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The examples show a typicalpassenger vehicle and lighttruck tire size.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire

(1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem C of the tire illustration, it


10-54 Vehicle Care

would mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire

(1) Light Truck (LT-Metric)Tire: The United States versionof a metric tire sizing system.The letters LT as the first twocharacters in the tire size meana light truck tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(2) Tire Width: The three-digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digitnumber that indicates the tireheight-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 75, as shown initem 3 of the light truck

(LT-Metric) tire illustration, itwould mean that the tire'ssidewall is 75 percent as high asit is wide.

(4) Construction Code: A lettercode is used to indicate the typeof ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial plyconstruction; the letter D meansdiagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter Bmeans belted-bias plyconstruction.

(5) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(6) Load Range: Load Range.

(7) Service Description: Theservice description indicates theload index and speed rating of atire. If two numbers are given asin the example, 120/116, thenthis represents the load index forsingle versus dual wheel usage


Vehicle Care 10-55

(single/dual). The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire iscertified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10-57.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-15.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.


10-56 Vehicle Care

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tirethat must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10-57 andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.


Vehicle Care 10-57

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10-66.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for a

tire's traction, temperature, andtreadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10-69.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lb) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size and

recommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-15.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

{ Caution

Neither tire underinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:

. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.(Continued)


10-58 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:

. Unusual wear.

. Poor handling.

. Rough ride.

. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9-15. Howthe vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more.

Do not forget the spare tire,if the vehicle has one. SeeFull-Size Spare Tire onpage 10-82 for additionalinformation.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.

Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re-check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.


Vehicle Care 10-59

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under-inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under-inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10-60.


10-60 Vehicle Care

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning light

located on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. Foradditional information and detailsabout the DIC operation anddisplays, see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5-26 and TireMessages on page 5-36.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that the

air pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9-15, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10-57.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10-63, Tire Rotation onpage 10-63, and Tires onpage 10-48.


Vehicle Care 10-61

{ Caution

Tire sealant materials are not allthe same. A non-approved tiresealant could damage the TPMSsensors. TPMS sensor damagecaused by using an incorrect tiresealant is not covered by thevehicle warranty. Always use onlythe GM approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning light

flashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. Themalfunction light and DIC warningmessage come on at each ignitioncycle until the problem is corrected.Some of the conditions that cancause these to come on are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC messageshould go off after the road tireis replaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See “TPMS SensorMatching Process” later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing the

sensor matching process. See“TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess” later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10-67.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealer


10-62 Vehicle Care

for service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message come onand stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thevehicle’s tires or replacing one ormore of the TPMS sensors. Also,the TPMS sensor matching processshould be performed after replacinga spare tire with a road tirecontaining the TPMS sensor. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off at the nextignition cycle. The sensors arematched to the tire/wheel positions,using a TPMS relearn tool, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire,passenger side front tire, passengerside rear tire, and driver side rear.See your dealer for service or topurchase a relearn tool.

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.


3. Make sure the Tire Pressure infopage option is turned on. Theinfo pages on the DIC can beturned on and off through theSettings menu. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5-26.

4. Use the DIC controls on the rightside of the steering wheel toscroll to the Tire Pressurescreen under the DIC info page.

5. Press and hold the V (Set/Reset) button located in thecenter of the DIC controls.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message displays onthe DIC screen.

6. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

7. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

8. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

9. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.


Vehicle Care 10-63

10. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 7. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

11. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF.

12. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11-3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Anytime unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible, check for proper tireinflation pressure, and check fordamaged tires or wheels. If theunusual wear continues after therotation, check the wheelalignment. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 10-66and Wheel Replacement onpage 10-71.

If your vehicle has dual rearwheels, also see Dual TireRotation on page 10-65.


10-64 Vehicle Care

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires if the vehiclehas single rear wheels.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires if the vehiclehas dual rear wheels (exceptpolished forged aluminumwheels).

Vehicles with polished forgedaluminum dual wheels havethree unique wheels; a front, arear outer and a rear inner.These wheels cannot be rotatedto another position, however,they can be rotated from left toright to the same position.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires if the vehiclehas polished forged aluminumdual rear wheels. The sparewheel can be used in anyposition and can be rotated withthe rear inner wheels.

When installing dual wheels,check that the vent holes in theinner and outer wheels on eachside are lined up.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire and


Vehicle Care 10-65

Loading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10-57and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9-15.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12-2.

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS), if the vehiclehas one. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10-60.

Check that the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, is storedproperly. Push, pull, and then tryto rotate or turn the tire. If itmoves, tighten the cable. See“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools” under Tire Changing onpage 10-74.

Dual Tire RotationWhen the vehicle is new,or whenever a wheel, wheel bolt,or wheel nut is replaced, check thewheel nut torque after160, 1 600, and 10 000 km (100,1,000, and 6,000 mi) of driving. Forproper torque and wheel nuttightening information, see“Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire” under TireChanging on page 10-74.

The outer tire on a dual wheel setupgenerally wears faster than theinner tire. Tires last longer and wearmore evenly if they are rotated. SeeTire Inspection on page 10-63 andTire Rotation on page 10-63. Alsosee Maintenance Schedule onpage 11-3.


10-66 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

If the vehicle is operated with atire that is underinflated, the tirecan overheat. An overheated tirecan lose air suddenly or catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Properly inflate all tires,including the spare.

See Tire Pressure on page 10-57,for information on proper tireinflation.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors, such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. Somecommercial truck tires may not havetreadwear indicators. See TireInspection on page 10-63 and TireRotation on page 10-63 foradditional information.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies to the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple factorsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressure

maintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. GM recommends thattires, including the spare ifequipped, be replaced after sixyears, regardless of tread wear. Thetire manufacturer date is the lastfour digits of the DOT TireIdentification Number (TIN) which ismolded into one side of the tiresidewall. The first two digitsrepresent the week (01-52) and thelast two digits, the year. Forexample, the third week of the year2010 would have a four-digit DOTdate of 0310.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.


Vehicle Care 10-67

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,

traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all-season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10-51 foradditional information.

GM recommends replacing worntires in complete sets of four (sixfor dual rear wheels). Uniformtread depth on all tires will helpto maintain the performance ofthe vehicle. Braking andhandling performance may beadversely affected if all the tiresare not replaced at the sametime. If proper rotation andmaintenance have been done,all four tires (six for dual rearwheels) should wear out at

about the same time. See TireRotation on page 10-63 forinformation on proper tirerotation. However, if it isnecessary to replace only oneaxle set of worn tires, place thenew tires on the rear axle (twofor single rear wheels, four fordual rear wheels).

{ Warning

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.


10-68 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

This vehicle may have adifferent size spare than theroad tires originally installedon the vehicle. When new, thevehicle included a spare tireand wheel assembly with asimilar overall diameter as theroad tires and wheels, so it isall right to drive on it. Thespare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle and will notaffect vehicle handling.

{ Warning

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow-pressure warning if non-TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10-59.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-15 for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, electronic stability control,or All-Wheel Drive, the performanceof these systems can also beaffected.


Vehicle Care 10-69

{ Warning

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10-67 and Accessories andModifications on page 10-3.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter tires,compact spare tires, tires with

nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tire


10-70 Vehicle Care

graded 150 would wear one andone-half (1½) times as well onthe government course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingare not necessary on a regularbasis. Consider an alignment checkif there is unusual tire wear or thevehicle is significantly pulling to oneside or the other. Some slight pull tothe left or right, depending on thecrown of the road and/or other road


Vehicle Care 10-71

surface variations such as troughsor ruts, is normal. If the vehicle isvibrating when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels may needto be rebalanced. See your dealerfor proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ Warning

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

{ Caution

The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brakecooling, speedometer orodometer calibration, headlampaim, bumper height, vehicle

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

ground clearance, and tire or tirechain clearance to the body andchassis.

Whenever a wheel, wheel bolt,or wheel nut is replaced on a dualwheel setup, check the wheel nuttorque after 160, 1 600 and10 000 km (100, 1,000 and 6,000 mi)of driving. For proper torque, see“Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications onpage 12-2.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10-72 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ Warning

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has been

(Continued)


10-72 Vehicle Care

Warning (Continued)

driven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ Warning

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash. Use anothertype of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it forthe vehicle's tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow that

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

manufacturer's instructions. Toavoid vehicle damage, driveslowly and readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the rear tires.

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ Warning

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it has beendriven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.


Vehicle Care 10-73

{ Warning

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6-4.

{ Warning

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. For four-wheel-drivevehicles, be sure thetransfer case is in a drivegear– not in N (Neutral).

4. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

5. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

(Continued)

Warning (Continued)

6. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (1).

1. Wheel Block

2. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to use the jack and changea tire.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

1. Wing Nut Retaining the WheelBlocks

2. Wheel Blocks

3. Retaining Bolt

4. Retaining Bracket and Wing Nut

5. Tool Kit and Jack Tools

6. Jack Knob

7. Jack

The equipment needed to change aflat tire is stored under thepassenger side second row seat.The spare tire is located underneaththe vehicle.

1. Fold the second row seatcushion up to access the jackand tools.

2. Turn the jack knob (6)counterclockwise to lower thejack head slightly to release thejack (7) from its holder.

3. Turn the wing nut retaining thewheel blocks (1)counterclockwise to remove thewheel blocks (2) and theretaining bolt (3).

4. Turn the wing nut (4), used toretain the storage bag and tools,counterclockwise to remove it.

Use the jack handle extensions andthe wheel wrench to remove theunderbody-mounted spare tire.

1. Spare Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

2. Tire/Wheel Retainer

3. Hoist Cable

4. Hoist Assembly

5. Hoist Shaft

6. Jack Handle Extensions

7. Wheel Wrench

8. Spare Tire Lock (If Equipped)

9. Hoist Shaft Access Hole

10. Hoist End of Extension Tool


Vehicle Care 10-75

1. Open the spare tire hoist accesshole cover on the bumper anduse the ignition key to removethe spare tire lock.

To remove the spare tire lock,insert the ignition key, turn itclockwise, and pull the lockstraight out.

2. Assemble the wheel wrench (7)and the two jack handleextensions (6), as shown.

3. Insert the hoist end (openend) (10) of the extensionthrough the hole (9) in the rearbumper.

Be sure the hoist end of theextension (10) connects to thehoist shaft. The ribbed squareend of the extension is used tolower the spare tire.

4. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thespare tire to the ground.Continue to turn the wheelwrench until the spare tire canbe pulled out from under thevehicle.

5. Use the wheel wrench hook topull the hoist cable closer toassist in reaching the spare tire.


10-76 Vehicle Care

6. Tilt the tire toward the vehiclewith some slack in the cable toallow access to the tire/wheelretainer.

Tilt the retainer and pull itthrough the center of the wheelalong with the cable and spring.

7. Put the spare tire near theflat tire.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

Use the following pictures andinstructions to remove the flat tireand raise the vehicle.

1. Jack

2. Wheel Blocks

3. Jack Handle

4. Jack Handle Extension

5. Wheel Wrench

The tools you will be using includethe jack (1), the wheel blocks (2),the jack handle (3), the jack handleextensions (4), and the wheelwrench (5).

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10-72.

2. Remove the center cap byplacing the chisel end of thewheel wrench in the slot on thewheel and gently prying thecap out.


Vehicle Care 10-77

3. Use the wheel wrench to loosenall the wheel nuts. Turn thewheel wrench counterclockwiseto loosen the wheel nuts. Do notremove the wheel nuts yet.

{ Warning

Getting under a vehicle when it islifted on a jack is dangerous.If the vehicle slips off the jack,you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehiclewhen it is supported only bya jack.

{ Warning

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

4. Position the jack under thevehicle. If the flat tire is on thefront of the vehicle, position thejack on the frame behind theflat tire.

If the flat tire is on the rear,position the jack under the rearaxle between the spring anchorand the shock absorber bracket.

Front Position

Rear Position

5. Remove all the wheel nuts andtake off the flat tire.


10-78 Vehicle Care

{ Warning

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

6. Remove any rust or dirt from thewheel bolts, mounting surfaces,and spare wheel.

{ Warning

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

7. Put the wheel nuts back on withthe rounded end of the nutstoward the wheel after mountingthe spare. Tighten each wheelnut by hand. Then use the wheelwrench to tighten the nuts untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

8. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to lower thevehicle. Lower the jackcompletely.


Vehicle Care 10-79

{ Warning

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

{ Caution

Improperly tightened wheel nutscan lead to brake pulsation androtor damage. To avoid expensivebrake repairs, evenly tighten thewheel nuts in the proper

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

sequence and to the propertorque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications forthe wheel nut torque specification.

9. Tighten the nuts firmly in acrisscross sequence as shownby turning the wheel wrenchclockwise.

For vehicles with dual wheels, havea technician check the wheel nuttightness of all wheels with a torquewrench after the first 160, 1 600,and 10 000 km (100, 1,000, and6,000 mi). Repeat this service

whenever you have a tire removedor serviced. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12-2.

When reinstalling the regular wheeland tire, also reinstall the centercap. Place the cap on the wheeland tap it into place until it seatsflush with the wheel. The cap onlygoes on one way. Be sure to line upthe tab on the center cap with theindentation on the wheel.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ Warning

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.


10-80 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Storing an aluminum wheel with aflat tire under your vehicle for anextended period of time or withthe valve stem pointing up candamage the wheel. Always stowthe wheel with the valve stempointing down and have thewheel/tire repaired as soon aspossible.

Store the tire under the rear of thevehicle in the spare tire carrier.

1. Spare Tire (Valve StemPointed Down)

2. Tire/Wheel Retainer

3. Hoist Cable

4. Hoist Assembly

5. Hoist Shaft

6. Jack Handle Extensions

7. Wheel Wrench

8. Spare Tire Lock (If Equipped)

9. Hoist Shaft Access Hole

10. Hoist End of Extension Tool

1. Put the tire on the ground at therear of the vehicle with the valvestem pointed down and tothe rear.

2. Pull the cable and springthrough the center of the wheel.Tilt the wheel retainer platedown and through the center ofthe wheel.

Make sure the retainer is fullyseated across the underside ofthe wheel.

3. Attach the wheel wrench (7) andextensions (6) together, asshown.


Vehicle Care 10-81

4. Insert the hoist end (10) throughthe hole (9) in the rear bumperand onto the hoist shaft.

Do not use the chiseled end ofthe wheel wrench.

5. Raise the tire part way upward.Make sure the retainer is seatedin the wheel opening.

6. Raise the tire fully against theunderside of the vehicle byturning the wheel wrenchclockwise until you hear twoclicks or feel it skip twice. Youcannot overtighten the cable.

7. Make sure the tire is storedsecurely. Push, pull, and then tryto turn the tire. If the tire moves,use the wheel wrench to tightenthe cable.

8. Reinstall the spare tire lock,if the vehicle has one.

To store the jack and jack tools:

1. Wing Nut Retaining WheelBlocks

2. Wheel Blocks

3. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Kit

4. Wheel Wrench and Extensions

5. Tool Bag

6. Jack Mounting Bracket

7. Jack

8. Bolt Retaining Wheel Blocks


10-82 Vehicle Care

1. Put the tools (4) in the toolbag (5) and place them in theretaining bracket (3).

2. Tighten down the wing nut (3).

3. Assemble the wheel blocks (2)and jack (7) together with thewing nut (1) and retainingbolt (8).

4. Position the jack (7) in themounting bracket (6). Positionthe holes in the base of thejack (7) onto the pin in themounting bracket (6).

5. Return them to their originallocation in the vehicle. See“Removing the Spare Tire andTools.”

Full-Size Spare TireIf this vehicle came with a full-sizespare tire, it was fully inflated whennew, however, it can lose air overtime. Check the inflation pressureregularly. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-57 and Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-15. For instructions on

how to remove, install, or store aspare tire, see Tire Changing onpage 10-74.

If equipped with a temporary usefull-size spare tire, it is indicated onthe tire sidewall. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10-51. This sparetire should not be driven on over112 km/h (70 mph), or 88 km/h(55 mph) when pulling a trailer, atthe proper inflation pressure.Repair and replace the road tire assoon as it is convenient, and stowthe spare tire for future use.

{ Caution

If the vehicle has four-wheel driveand a different size spare tire isinstalled, do not drive infour-wheel drive until the flat tireis repaired and/or replaced. Thevehicle could be damaged andthe repairs would not be coveredby the warranty. Never use

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

four-wheel drive when a differentsize spare tire is installed on thevehicle.

The vehicle may have a differentsize spare tire than the road tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle.This spare tire was developed foruse on this vehicle, so it is all rightto drive on it. If the vehicle hasfour-wheel drive and a different sizespare tire is installed, drive only intwo-wheel drive.

After installing the spare tire on thevehicle, stop as soon as possibleand check that the spare tire iscorrectly inflated.

Have the damaged or flat road tirerepaired or replaced and installedback onto the vehicle as soon aspossible so the spare tire will beavailable in case it is needed again.


Vehicle Care 10-83

Do not mix tires and wheels ofdifferent sizes, because they will notfit. Keep your spare tire and itswheel together. If the vehicle has aspare tire that does not match theoriginal road tires and wheels in sizeand type, do not include the spare inthe tire rotation.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10-28.

If the vehicle's battery (or batteries)has run down, you may want to useanother vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sureto use the following steps to do itsafely.

{ Warning

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

{ Caution

Ignoring these steps could resultin costly damage to the vehiclethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Trying to startthe vehicle by pushing or pulling itwill not work, and it could damagethe vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

{ Caution

If the other vehicle does not havea 12-volt system with a negativeground, both vehicles can bedamaged. Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jump starting.

2. If you have a vehicle with adiesel engine with two batteries,you should know before you


10-84 Vehicle Care

begin that, especially in coldweather, you may not be able toget enough power from a singlebattery in another vehicle to startyour diesel engine. If yourvehicle has more than onebattery, using the battery that iscloser to the starter will reduceelectrical resistance. This islocated on the passenger side,in the rear of the enginecompartment.

3. Get the vehicles close enoughso the jumper cables can reach,but be sure the vehicles are nottouching each other. If they are,it could cause an unwantedground connection. You wouldnot be able to start your vehicle,and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.

To avoid the possibility of thevehicles rolling, set the parkingbrake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump startprocedure. Put the automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in Neutral

before setting the parking brake.If you have a four-wheel-drivevehicle, be sure the transfercase is in a drive gear, not inN (Neutral).

{ Caution

If any accessories are left on orplugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible, turnoff or unplug all accessories oneither vehicle when jump starting.

4. Turn off the ignition on bothvehicles. Unplug unnecessaryaccessories plugged into theaccessory power outlets. Turnoff the radio and all the lampsthat are not needed. This willavoid sparks and help save bothbatteries. And it could save theradio!

5. Open the hood on the othervehicle and locate thepositive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on thatvehicle.

The positive (+) terminal is undera red plastic cover at the positivebattery post. To uncover thepositive (+) terminal, open thered plastic cover.

For more information on thelocation of the remotepositive (+) and remote negative(−) terminals, see EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10-5.

{ Warning

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.


Vehicle Care 10-85

{ Warning

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ Warning

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

6. Check that the jumper cables donot have loose or missinginsulation. If they do, you couldget a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.

Before you connect the cables,here are some basic things youshould know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remotenegative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.

Do not connect positive (+) tonegative (−) or you will get ashort that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts

too. And do not connect thenegative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on thedead battery because this cancause sparks.

5.3L Shown, 6.0L, 6.2L, and 6.6LSimilar

7. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalof the vehicle with the deadbattery.

8. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the good


10-86 Vehicle Care

battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

9. Connect the black negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminalof the good battery. Use aremote negative (−) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.

10. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable. 5.3L and 6.2L

‐ To the metal bracket that isbolted to the engine andsupports the resonator, onthe vehicle with the deadbattery.

6.0L

‐ To the generator bracket, onthe vehicle with the deadbattery.


Vehicle Care 10-87

6.6L

‐ To the negative (−) post onthe auxiliary battery, on thevehicle with the dead battery.

11. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine for awhile.

12. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

{ Caution

If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correct order,making sure that the cables donot touch each other or othermetal.

Jumper Cable Removal

Reverse the sequence exactly whenremoving the jumper cables.

Towing the Vehicle

{ Caution

Incorrectly towing a disabledvehicle may cause damage. Thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Do not lashor hook to the chassiscomponents — including the frontand rear subframes, suspensioncontrol arms, and links — duringtowing and recovery of a disabledvehicle, or when securing thevehicle. Use the proper nylonstrap harnesses around the tiresto secure the vehicle.

Have the vehicle towed on a flatbedcar carrier or a wheel lift tow truck.If a wheel lift tow truck is used, thedrive wheels cannot contact theroad while the vehicle is beingtowed. A wheel dolly must be usedto lift all drive wheels off the ground.


10-88 Vehicle Care

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing”following.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle, such as a motor home. Thetwo most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betraveled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

{ Caution

If the vehicle is towed with all fourwheels on the ground, thedrivetrain components could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not tow the vehiclewith all four wheels on theground.


Vehicle Care 10-89

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with all four wheels on theground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while beingtowed.

Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles

See your dealer for the procedure totow this vehicle.

Dolly Towing

Front Towing (Front Wheels Offthe Ground) – Two-Wheel-DriveVehicles

{ Caution

If a two-wheel-drive vehicle istowed with the rear wheels on theground, the transmission could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Never tow the vehiclewith the rear wheels on theground.

Two-wheel-drive vehicles should notbe towed with the rear wheels onthe ground. Two-wheel-drivetransmissions have no provisionsfor internal lubrication while beingtowed.

To dolly tow a two-wheel-drivevehicle, the vehicle must be towedwith the rear wheels on the dolly.See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Offthe Ground)” later in this section formore information.

Front Towing (Front Wheels Offthe Ground) – Four-Wheel-DriveVehicles


Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Offthe Ground)

Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles


10-90 Vehicle Care

Use the following procedure to dollytow a two-wheel-drive vehicle fromthe rear:

1. Attach the dolly to the towvehicle following the dollymanufacturer's instructions.

2. Drive the rear wheels onto thedolly.

3. Firmly set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9-49.

4. Put the transmission in P (Park).

5. Secure the vehicle to the dollyfollowing the manufacturer'sinstructions.

6. Use an adequate clampingdevice designed for towing toensure that the front wheels arelocked into the straight position.


Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles


Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Locks

Locks are lubricated at the factory.Use a de-icing agent only whenabsolutely necessary, and have thelocks greased after using. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

{ Caution

Do not use petroleum-based,acidic, or abrasive cleaningagents as they can damage thevehicle's paint, metal, or plasticparts. If damage occurs, it wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Approved cleaning

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

products can be obtained fromyour dealer. Follow allmanufacturer directions regardingcorrect product usage, necessarysafety precautions, andappropriate disposal of anyvehicle care product.

{ Caution

Avoid using high-pressurewashes closer than 30 cm (12 in)to the surface of the vehicle. Useof power washers exceeding8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can resultin damage or removal of paintand decals.

This symbole is on anyunderhood compartment electricalcenter that should not be power


Vehicle Care 10-91

washed. This could cause damagethat would not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

If using an automatic car wash,follow with the car washinstructions. The windshield wiperand rear window wiper, if equipped,must be off. Remove anyaccessories that may be damagedor interfere with the car washequipment.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed and

repaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Do not apply waxes or polishes touncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber,decals, simulated wood, or flat paintas damage can occur.

{ Caution

Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalMoldings

{ Caution

Failure to clean and protect thebright metal moldings can resultin a hazy white finish or pitting.This damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


10-92 Vehicle Care

The bright metal moldings on thevehicle are aluminum. To preventdamage always follow thesecleaning instructions:. Be sure the molding is cool to

the touch before applying anycleaning solution.

. Use a cleaning solutionapproved for aluminum. Somecleaners are highly acidic orcontain alkaline substances andcan damage the moldings.

. Always dilute a concentratedcleaner according to themanufacturer’s instructions.

. Do not use chrome cleaners.

. Do not use cleaners that are notintended for automotive use.

. Use a nonabrasive wax on thevehicle after washing to protectand extend the molding finish.

Spray-In Bedliner Care

A spray-in bedliner is a permanentcoating that bonds to the truck bedand cannot be removed. Promptly

rinse the bedliner surface followinga chemical spill to avoid permanentdamage.

Spray-in bedliners can fade fromoxidation, road dirt, heavy-dutyhauling, and hard water stains.Clean it periodically by washing offthe loose dirt and using a milddetergent. To restore the originalappearance, apply the bedlinerconditioner available through yourdealer.

{ Caution

Using silicone-based productsmay damage the bedliner, reducethe slip-resistant texture, andattract dirt.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses, Emblems, Decals andStripes

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps, lenses,

emblems, decals and stripes. Followinstructions under "Washing theVehicle" previously in this section.

Lamp covers are made of plastic,and some have a UV protectivecoating.

Use only lukewarm water, a softcloth, and mild car washing soap toclean exterior lamps and lenses. Donot clean or wipe them while theyare dry.

Do not use any of the following onlamp covers:. Abrasive or caustic agents.. Washer fluids and other cleaning

agents in higher concentrationsthan suggested by themanufacturer.

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,or other harsh cleaners.

. Ice scrapers or other hard items.

. Aftermarket appearance caps orcovers while the lamps areilluminated, due to excessiveheat generated.


Vehicle Care 10-93

{ Caution

Failure to clean lamps properlycan cause damage to the lampcover that would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.

{ Caution

Using wax on low gloss blackfinish stripes can increase thegloss level and create anon-uniform finish. Clean lowgloss stripes with soap andwater only.

Air Intakes

Clear debris from the air intakes,between the hood and windshield,when washing the vehicle.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply Dielectric silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. Lubricate weatherstripsonce a year. Hot, dry climates mayrequire more frequent application.Black marks from rubber material onpainted surfaces can be removed byrubbing with a clean cloth. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

{ Caution

Using petroleum-based tiredressing products on the vehiclemay damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off anyoverspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.


10-94 Vehicle Care

{ Caution

Chrome wheels and other chrometrim may be damaged if thevehicle is not washed after drivingon roads that have been sprayedwith magnesium, calcium,or sodium chloride. Thesechlorides are used on roads forconditions such as ice and dust.Always wash the chrome withsoap and water after exposure.

{ Caution

To avoid surface damage, do notuse strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners,brushes, or cleaners that containacid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through an

(Continued)

Caution (Continued)

automatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wear atleast once a year.

Inspect power steering for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc.

Visually check constant velocity jointboots and axle seals for leaks.

1500 Series vehicles, at least everyother oil change lubricate the outertie rod ends.

Control arm ball joints on 1500series vehicles aremaintenance-free.

{ Caution

Lubrication of applicable Steering/Suspension points should not bedone unless temperature is -12°C(10°F) or higher, or damage couldresult.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thesteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

At least twice a year, Spring andFall, use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody car


Vehicle Care 10-95

washing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface. Refer to “Finish Care”previously in this section.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellent from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. Apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Do not spray cleaners directlyon any switches or controls.Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners toremain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.


10-96 Vehicle Care

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.8 L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

{ Caution

To prevent scratching, never useabrasive cleaners on automotiveglass. Abrasive cleaners oraggressive cleaning may damagethe rear window defogger.

Cleaning the windshield with waterduring the first three to six monthsof ownership will reduce tendencyto fog.

Speaker Covers

Vacuum around a speaker covergently, so that the speaker will notbe damaged. Clean spots with justwater and mild soap.

Coated Moldings

Coated moldings should be cleaned.. When lightly soiled, wipe with a

sponge or soft lint-free clothdampened with water.

. When heavily soiled, use warmsoapy water.

Fabric/Carpet/Suede

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water.Microfiber cloth is recommendedto prevent lint transfer to thefabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.


Vehicle Care 10-97

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Rotate the cleaning clothto a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by plainwater.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Cleaning High Gloss Surfacesand Vehicle Information andRadio Displays

For vehicles with high glosssurfaces or vehicle displays, use amicrofiber cloth to wipe surfaces.Before wiping the surface with themicrofiber cloth, use a soft bristlebrush to remove dirt that couldscratch the surface. Then use themicrofiber cloth by gently rubbing toclean. Never use window cleanersor solvents. Periodically hand washthe microfiber cloth separately,using mild soap. Do not use bleachor fabric softener. Rinse thoroughlyand air dry before next use.

{ Caution

Do not attach a device with asuction cup to the display. Thismay cause damage and wouldnot be covered by the warranty.

Instrument Panel, Leather,Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces,Low Gloss Paint Surfaces andNatural Open Pore WoodSurfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

{ Caution

Soaking or saturating leather,especially perforated leather, aswell as other interior surfaces,may cause permanent damage.Wipe excess moisture from thesesurfaces after cleaning and allowthem to dry naturally. Never useheat, steam, spot lifters, or spotremovers. Do not use cleanersthat contain silicone or wax-basedproducts. Cleaners containing

(Continued)


10-98 Vehicle Care

Caution (Continued)

these solvents can permanentlychange the appearance and feelof leather or soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

{ Caution

Use of air fresheners may causepermanent damage to plasticsand painted surfaces. If an airfreshener comes in contact withany plastic or painted surface inthe vehicle, blot immediately andclean with a soft cloth dampenedwith a mild soap solution.Damage caused by air freshenerswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ Warning

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ Warning

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the pedals. Alwayscheck that the floor mats do notinterfere with the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


Vehicle Care 10-99

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the driver sidefloor mat to unlock each retainerand remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snapping into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


10-100 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-16

General InformationThis maintenance section applies tovehicles with a gasoline engine. Fordiesel engine vehicles, see themaintenance schedule section inthe Duramax diesel supplement.

Your vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup-to-date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesy

transportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

{ Caution

Damage caused by impropermaintenance can lead to costlyrepairs and may not be coveredby the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services.

Normal Service

All maintenance services, includingthose listed under AdditionalRequired Services, are forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9-15.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeFuel on page 9-64.

Severe Service

In addition to the normal serviceschedule, some vehicles requireservice more often. Severe serviceis for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic

in hot weather.. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high-speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

{ Warning

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10-3.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10-8.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10-57.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10-63.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-25.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle service

for more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10-11.

Passenger Compartment AirFilter

The passenger compartment airfilter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.Inspect the passenger compartmentair filter every 36 000 km/22,500 miles or two years,whichever comes first. Replace ifnecessary. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavy

traffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10-63.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10-8 and Engine OilLife System on page 10-11.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10-18.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10-25.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See Exterior



Care on page 10-34. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10-34.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10-57.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10-63.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10-15.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs of wearat least once a year. SeeExterior Care on page 10-90.Lubricate the suspension andsteering components at leastevery other oilchange. (If equipped with greasefittings)

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3-16.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10-90.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10-33.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10-33.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10-34.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10-34.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2-21.

. Verify spare tire key lockoperation and lubricate asneeded. See Tire Changing onpage 10-74.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Normal

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Change automatic transmission fluid. Changefilter if serviceable. @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with4WD. (4) @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (5) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (6) @

Replace brake fluid. (7) @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(2) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(3) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(4) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-16.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.



Maintenance ScheduleAdditional RequiredServices - Severe

12000km/7,500mi

24000km/15,000mi

36000km/22,500mi

48000km/30,000mi

60000km/37,500mi

72000km/45,000mi

84000km/52,500mi

96000km/60,000mi

108000km/67,500mi

120000km/75,000mi

132000km/82,500mi

144000km/90,000mi

156000km/97,500mi

168000km/105,000mi

180000km/112,500mi

192000km/120,000mi

204000km/127,500mi

216000km/135,000mi

228000km/142,500mi

240000km/150,000mi

Rotate tires and perform Required Services.Check engine oil level and oil life percentage.Change engine oil and filter, if needed.

@ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @

Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @

Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @

Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plug wires. @

Change automatic transmission fluid. Changefilter if serviceable. @ @ @

Change transfer case fluid, if equipped with4WD. (4) @ @ @

Extreme Service: Change transfer case fluid,if equipped with 4WD. (5) @ @ @ @ @ @

Drain and fill engine cooling system. (6) @

Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (7) @

Replace brake fluid. (8) @



Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

(1) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

(1) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook-up,routing, and condition.

(2) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

(3) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

(4) Extreme service. For vehiclesmainly driven off-road in four-wheeldrive or used in farming, mining,forestry, Department of NaturalResources (DNR), or snow plowing.

(5) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10-16.

(6) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

(7) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

Special ApplicationServices. Vehicles with Dual Wheels:

Check dual wheel nut torque at160, 1 600 and 10 000 km (100,1,000 and 6,000 mi) of driving.Repeat this service whenever atire/wheel is serviced orremoved.

. Severe Commercial UseVehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed. See “UnderbodyMaintenance” in Exterior Careon page 10-90.



AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired.

It is recommended that your dealerperform these services — theirtrained dealer technicians knowyour vehicle best. Your dealer canalso perform a thoroughassessment with a multi-pointinspection to recommend when yourvehicle may need attention.

The following list is intended toexplain the services and conditionsto look for that may indicateservices are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.

. To avoid break-down or failure tostart the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion-free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the belts andrecommend adjustment orreplacement when necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi-point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.



Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi-point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi-pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspect

the shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money and fuel,and can reduce the risk of tirefailure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10-95 and Exterior Care onpage 10-90.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.



Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and LubricantsThis maintenance section applies to vehicles with a gasoline engine. If the vehicle has a diesel engine and/or anAllison Transmission, see the maintenance schedule section in the Duramax diesel supplement.

Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specification of the proper SAEviscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended. SeeEngine Oil on page 10-8.

Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10-18.

Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, inCanada 19299819).

Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protectionrequirements.

Hydraulic Power Steering System(HD Only)

GM Power Steering Fluid (GM Part No. 89021185, in Canada 89021186).

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).




Floor Shift Linkage Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2 Category LB or GC-LB.

Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) orlubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Front Axle (1500 Series) –Four-Wheel Drive

SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021671, inCanada 89021672).

Front Axle (2500/3500) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, inCanada 89021678).

Rear Axle (1500) SAE 75W-85 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 19300457, inCanada 19300458).

Rear Axle (2500/3500) SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021677, inCanada 89021678).

Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Front Axle Driveshaft Splines (All1500/2500/3500 Series) and RearAxle Driveshaft Splines (All 1500

Series with Automatic Transmission)

Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. 19257121, inCanada 19257122).

Hood Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).




Body Door Hinge Pins, TailgateHinge and Linkage, and Fuel Door

Hinge

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Tailgate Handle Pivot Points, Hinges,Latch Bolt, and Linkage

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).

Weatherstrip Squeaks Synthetic Grease with Teflon, Superlube (GM Part No. 12371287, inCanada 10953437).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

If your vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement for more information.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 15908915 A3085C

Oil Filter

5.3L V8 89017525 PF63

6.2L V8 89017525 PF63

6.0L V8 89017524 PF48

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 22808781 CF188

Spark Plugs

5.3L V8 12622441 41–114

6.2L V8 12622441 41–114

6.0L V8 12621258 41–110

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 22754397 -

Passenger Side – 55 cm (21.7 in) 22754398 -



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12-2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11-12.

If the vehicle has a diesel engine, see the Duramax diesel supplement.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type andcharge amount, see the refrigerant label under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System 15.7 L 16.6 qt

Engine Oil with Filter 8.0 L 8.5 qt

Fuel Tank

1500 Series 98.4 L 26.0 gal

2500 Series and 3500 Series Standard Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal

3500 Series Long Box 136.3 L 36.0 gal

Transfer Case Fluid 1.5 L 1.6 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.


Technical Data 12-3

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Spark Plug Gap

5.3L V8 (L83) C 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)

6.0L V8 (L96) G 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)

6.2L V8 (L86) J 0.95–1.10 mm (0.037–0.043 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

5.3L and 6.2L V8 Engines

6.0L V8 Engines



Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-11

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Infotainment System . . . . . . . . 13-15Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concerns withthe sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-462-8782. In Canada, callGeneral Motors of CanadaCustomer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility. That iswhy we suggest following Step Onefirst.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofilling out a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus,Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inapproximately 70 days. We believeour impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesGMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States and Puerto Rico

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.GMC.com

1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)1-800-462-8583 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-888-881-3302

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance

Center. Any TTY user cancommunicate with GMC by dialing:1-800-462-8583. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Experience(U.S.) my.gmc.com

The GMC online owner experienceis a one-stop resource that allowsinteraction with GMC and keepsimportant vehicle-specificinformation in one place.

Membership Benefits

E (Vehicle Information):Download owner manuals and viewvehicle-specific how-to videos.

G (Maintenance Information):View maintenance schedules,required alerts, OnStar onboardvehicle diagnostic information, andschedule service appointments.

I (Service History): Viewprintable dealer-recorded servicerecords and self-recorded servicerecords.

D (Preferred DealerInformation): Select a preferreddealer and view dealer location,maps, phone numbers, and hours.

J (Warranty TrackingInformation): Track the vehicle’swarranty information.

J (Recall Information): Viewactive recalls or search by VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). SeeVehicle Identification Number (VIN)on page 12-1.

H (Other Account Information):View GM Card, SiriusXM Satelliteradio, and OnStar accountinformation.

F (Live Chat Support): Chat livewith online help representatives.

Visit my.gmc.com to register yourvehicle.



GMC Owner Centre (Canada)gmcowner.ca

Take a trip to the GMC OwnerCentre:. Chat live with online help

representatives.. Use the Vehicle Tools section.. Access third party enthusiast

sites and social media networks.. Locate owner resources such as

lease-end, financing, andwarranty information.

. Retrieve your favorite articles,quizzes, tips and multimediagalleries organized into theFeatures and Auto CareSections.

. Download the owner manual foryour vehicle, quickly and easily.

. Find the GMC-recommendedmaintenance services for yourvehicle.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.caor call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.-purchased vehicles, call1-888-881-3302; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1-888-889-2438).

For Canadian-purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number. Telephone number of your

location. Location of the vehicle



. Model, year, color, and licenseplate number of the vehicle

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide the

claims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before this serviceis given.

. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was in acrash and cannot be driven.Assistance is also given whenthe vehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expenses maybe reimbursed during the5 years/(160 000 km) 100,000 miPowertrain warranty period.Items considered are hotel,meals, and rental car.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.



. Mounting, dismounting,or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometres from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,

the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.



Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid-specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicleprovides detailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offerone of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone-way or round-trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported by

original receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,



insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific information aboutavailability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed from

vehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.



Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs through the use ofaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, we

recommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13-5.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.



Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3-23.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair using

aftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.



In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyManual.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), seeHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedAttention: Customer Service47911 Halyard DrivePlymouth, MI 48170

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.



However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, please notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7



Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThe vehicle has a number ofcomputers that record informationabout the vehicle’s performance andhow it is driven. For example, thevehicle uses computer modules tomonitor and control engine andtransmission performance, tomonitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy them in acrash, and, if equipped, to provideantilock braking to help the drivercontrol the vehicle. These modulesmay store data to help the dealertechnician service the vehicle.Some modules may also store dataabout how the vehicle is operated,such as rate of fuel consumption oraverage speed. These modules mayretain personal preferences, such asradio presets, seat positions, andtemperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). Themain purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a roadobstacle, data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’ssystems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related tovehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time,typically 30 seconds or less. TheEDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:. How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened;

. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

These data can help provide abetter understanding of thecircumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data arerecorded by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crash situation occurs; nodata are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender,age, and crash location) arerecorded. However, other parties,such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the typeof personally identifying dataroutinely acquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,



if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withOnStar® and has an activesubscription, additional data may becollected through the OnStarsystem. This includes informationabout the vehicle’s operation;collisions involving the vehicle; theuse of the vehicle and its features;and, in certain situations, thelocation and approximate GPSspeed of the vehicle. Refer to the

OnStar Terms and Conditions andPrivacy Statement on the OnStarwebsite.

Infotainment SystemIf the vehicle is equipped with anavigation system as part of theinfotainment system, use of thesystem may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephonenumbers, and other trip information.See the infotainment manual forinformation on stored data and fordeletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitters for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology in

GM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PressQ or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Press= to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.

PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check of thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.


14-2 OnStar

Press the OnStar Emergencybutton> to get a priorityconnection to an EmergencyAdvisor available 24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get assistance in severe

weather or other crisis andevacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in most crashes,even if help cannot be requested.

Press> to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if equipped. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if equippedwith automatic door locks, and canhelp police locate the vehicle if it isstolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PressQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen, if equipped.Destinations can also be forwardedto the vehicle from MapQuest.com.The OnStar mapping database iscontinuously updated. For coveragemaps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Turn-by-Turn Navigation

1. PressQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say“Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Do you want tocancel directions?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, request completed, thankyou, goodbye.”

Route Preview

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.

Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.

Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with theaddress and the distance to thedestination, then responds with“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations fromMapQuest.com to their Turn-by-TurnNavigation or screen-basednavigation system. When ready, thedirections will be downloaded to thevehicle.

Destination Download: PressQ,then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.

After the call ends, press the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

If directions are downloaded to thenavigation system, the route canonly be canceled through thenavigation system.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can also becontrolled through the OnStarRemoteLink® mobile app. Forcoverage maps, seewww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada).


14-4 OnStar

OnStar Mobile App

Download the OnStar RemoteLinkmobile app to select Apple®,Android™, and BlackBerry® devicesto check vehicle fuel level, oil life,or tire pressure; to start the vehicle(if equipped) or unlock it; or toconnect to an OnStar Advisor. ForOnStar RemoteLink information andcompatibility, see www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada).

Hands-Free Calling

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Calling 911 Emergency

1. Press=. System responds:“OnStar ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Call.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say “911” without pausing.System responds: “911.”

4. Say “Call.” System responds:“OK, dialing 911.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is,”then says the number.

End a Call

Press=. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. Systemresponds: “About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to tryagain. System responds: “OK,storing <name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”


OnStar 14-5

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Press= and say “Minutes” then“Verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If anOn-Demand Diagnostics check isneeded between e-mails, pressQ,and an Advisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PressQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PressQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions:. Call 888-4-ONSTAR

(888-466-7827).. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).. Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.

. PressQ to speak with anAdvisor.

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for features


14-6 OnStar

to function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStarservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyond thecontrol of OnStar may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of the

vehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13-15.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PressQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard-of-hearing, or speech-impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer-installed TTY

system can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn-by-Turn Navigation.

OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca(Canada)

The website provides access toaccount information, allowsmanagement of the OnStarsubscription, and viewing of videosof each service. Get subscriptionplan pricing and sign up for OnStarVehicle Diagnostics. Click on the“My Account” tab on the homepage. The website navigation andservices provided may vary bycountry.

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. To


OnStar 14-7

change the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty. Themanufacturer of the vehiclefurnishes detailed warrantyinformation.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in multiple languages.PressQ and ask an Advisor.Advisors are available in English,Spanish and French. Availablelanguages may vary by country.

Potential Issues

OnStar cannot perform RemoteDoor Unlock or Stolen VehicleAssistance after the vehicle hasbeen off continuously for five days.After five days, OnStar can contact

Roadside Assistance and alocksmith to help gain access to thevehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbal

route or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PressQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.


14-8 OnStar

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9-90. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com (U.S.),or www.onstar.ca (Canada).Privacy-sensitive users of wirelesscommunications are cautioned thatthe privacy of any information sentvia wireless cellular communicationscannot be assured. Third partiesmay unlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.

OnStar - libcurl and unzipacknowledgments

Certain OnStar components includelibcurl and unzip software. Beloware the notices and licensesassociated with this software:

libcurl:

COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSIONNOTICE

Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, DanielStenberg, <[email protected]>.

All rights reserved.

Permission to use, copy, modify,and distribute this software for anypurpose with or without fee ishereby granted, provided that theabove copyright notice and thispermission notice appear in allcopies.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OFANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOTLIMITED TO THE WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESSFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSEAND NONINFRINGEMENT OFTHIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NOEVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS ORCOPYRIGHT HOLDERS BELIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,WHETHER IN AN ACTION OFCONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,OUT OF OR IN CONNECTIONWITH THE SOFTWARE OR THEUSE OR OTHER DEALINGS INTHE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice,the name of a copyright holder shallnot be used in advertising orotherwise to promote the sale, useor other dealings in this Softwarewithout prior written authorization ofthe copyright holder.


OnStar 14-9

unzip:

This is version 2005-Feb-10 of theInfo-ZIP copyright and license. Thedefinitive version of this documentshould be available at ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/license.html indefinitely.

Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. Allrights reserved.

For the purposes of this copyrightand license, “Info-ZIP” is defined asthe following set of individuals:

Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis,Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois,Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, EdGordon, Ian Gorman, ChrisHerborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig,Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson,Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum,Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden,Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller,Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens,George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, KaiUwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury,Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda,

Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta,Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren,Rich Wales, Mike White

This software is provided “as is,”without warranty of any kind,express or implied. In no event shallInfo-ZIP or its contributors be heldliable for any direct, indirect,incidental, special or consequentialdamages arising out of the use of orinability to use this software.

Permission is granted to anyone touse this software for any purpose,including commercial applications,and to alter it and redistribute itfreely, subject to the followingrestrictions:

1. Redistributions of source codemust retain the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions.

2. Redistributions in binary form(compiled executables) mustreproduce the above copyrightnotice, definition, disclaimer, andthis list of conditions indocumentation and/or other

materials provided with thedistribution. The sole exceptionto this condition is redistributionof a standard UnZipSFX binary(including SFXWiz) as part of aself-extracting archive; that ispermitted without inclusion ofthis license, as long as thenormal SFX banner has notbeen removed from the binary ordisabled.

3. Altered versions–including, butnot limited to, ports to newoperating systems, existing portswith new graphical interfaces,and dynamic, shared, or staticlibrary versions–must be plainlymarked as such and must not bemisrepresented as being theoriginal source. Such alteredversions also must not bemisrepresented as beingInfo-ZIP releases–including, butnot limited to, labeling of thealtered versions with the names“Info-ZIP” (or any variationthereof, including, but not limitedto, different capitalizations),


14-10 OnStar

“Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or“MacZip” without the explicitpermission of Info-ZIP. Suchaltered versions are furtherprohibited frommisrepresentative use of theZip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mailaddresses or of theInfo-ZIP URL(s).

4. Info-ZIP retains the right to usethe names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”and “MacZip” for its own sourceand binary releases.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Active Fuel Management® . . . . . 9-32Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90

Adding a Snow Plow orSimilar Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90

Additional InformationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Adjustable Throttle andBrake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-15Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

Airbag System (cont'd)What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-19AirbagsAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-16Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

All-Terrain Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Assistance Systems forDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60

Assistance Systems forParking and Backing . . . . . . . . . 9-57

AutomaticDimming Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-12

Automatic TransmissionManual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

AuxiliaryRoof Mounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Axle, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Axle, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-34Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15BrakePedal and AdjustableThrottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24

System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-20Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 10-37Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-38Taillamps, Turn Signal,Stoplamps, andBack-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-66Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

CargoTie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-3Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) andCargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38

Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-17CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-34


INDEX i-3

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-38

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45, 3-47Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-95

Climate Control SystemsDual Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9CompartmentsStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

ConnectionsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3

ControlTraction and ElectronicStability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-50

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . .13-11

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8DiagnosticsOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4Driver Assistance Systems . . . . 9-56Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26


i-4 INDEX

DrivingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-60Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-21Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-12If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-14Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-15Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Dual Automatic ClimateControl System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Dual TireRotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

EE85 or FlexFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Instrument PanelFuse Block . . . . . . . . . 10-44, 10-46

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39EmergencyOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-5Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Cooling System Messages . . .5-31Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Engine (cont'd)Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . .5-12Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-33Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-80Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps Off Reminder . . . 6-2

FFanEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Fast Idle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28FeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8


INDEX i-5

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-15

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

FlexFuelE85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66

Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-98FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-12Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Four-Wheel DriveTransfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . .6-5, 10-37

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60

Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 9-39, 10-29Four-Wheel-Drive Light . . . . . . . . 5-21Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25

Front SeatsHeated and Cooled . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-67Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-66Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-24Management, Active . . . . . . . . . .9-32Requirements, California . . . . .9-66System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Full-Size Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-82Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Engine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Instrument PanelFuse Block . . . . . . . . . 10-44, 10-46

GGarage Door Opener . . . . . . . . . . 5-46Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

GasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-12Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glass Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5


i-6 INDEX

HHalogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-25High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-25

HeatedSteering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Heated and Cooled FrontSeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-12Hill Descent Control (HDC) . . . . 9-52Hill Descent Control Light . . . . . . 5-22Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-50Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

IIdle SystemFast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28

Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12IndicatorVehicle Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Interior Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . 2-17Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-33Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-51LampsAuxiliary RoofMounted Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-3Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lamps OffReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-17


INDEX i-7

Lamps (cont'd)Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62

Lane Departure WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-45

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

LED Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36LightHill Decent Control . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-20

Lights (cont'd)Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Four-Wheel-Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-22Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-15Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-24Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-17Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31


i-8 INDEX

Messages (cont'd)Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-31Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Object Detection System . . . . .5-33Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-34Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-38Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Automatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Mirrors, Interior Rearview . . . . . . 2-17Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

NNavigationOnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Noise Control System . . . . . . . . 10-32

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8Engine Oil Life System . . . . . .10-11Engine Oil PressureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-31Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

OnStar®

System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22OnStar® AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

PParkShifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17


INDEX i-9

ParkingBrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-34

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-32Parking or BackingAssistance Systems . . . . . . . . . .9-57

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-24Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39

Pickup Conversion toChassis Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-94

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-29

Power (cont'd)Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Rear Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Rearview MirrorsAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6ReplacementGlass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-30Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-17

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12


i-10 INDEX

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Safety Belts (cont'd)Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-17Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-16

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7SeatsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-3Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45, 3-47

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-16Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-90Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11


INDEX i-11

StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-33Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Heated Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Steering System Messages . . . . 5-35Stoplamps and Back-up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Sunglasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Sunglass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

SystemForward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1, 13-15Noise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

SystemsDriver Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-12Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Throttle, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4TiresAll-Terrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Dual Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Tires (cont'd)Full-Size Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-60Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-59Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-71When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Tow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Tow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-70Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-80General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-70


i-12 INDEX

Towing (cont'd)Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-88Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .9-89Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87

TractionControl System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Traction Control/ElectronicStability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .9-89Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-73

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-36

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Truck-Camper LoadingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

UUniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69

Universal Remote System . . . . . 5-46Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-46

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-38Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Vehicle (cont'd)Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Speed Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87

Vehicle Ahead Indicator . . . . . . . 5-22Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Voltmeter Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-62

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39


INDEX i-13

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-37Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-34


i-14 INDEX

2 NOTES

Denali Owner's Manual - GMC · GMC Sierra Denali Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico-...

Documents

Transcript of Denali Owner's Manual - GMC · GMC Sierra Denali Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada/Mexico-...